4. 大双品显示巴利原文
4. Mahāyamakavaggo
1. 小牛角经注疏显示巴利原文
1. Cūḷagosiṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
325 「Ñātīnaṃ」(亲戚们的)(《增支部》注3.6.19):亲戚们居住的村落名为ñātiko,亦即nātiko。据说那村落属于某些人,其祖先为了令自己的亲戚们共享而建立,因此得名「那提迦」。后来,该村落由两位继承人分成两份使用,所以经中说「两个小父大父之子的两个村落」。「giñjakā」指砖,纯用砖建造的住处即「giñjakāvasatho」(砖舍)。据说该地区的泥土不含石子、砂砾或瓦砾,不粗糙,细腻柔软;用此土烧制的陶器也如石头般坚固。因此,那些优婆塞用这种泥土制成又长又厚的砖,除门框、窗框、门扇、横梁之外,所有部分完全不使用木材等材料,纯粹用砖建成了殿堂。所以经中说「仅用砖」等。显示巴利原文
325. Ñātīnaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 3.6.19) nivāsaṭṭhānabhūto gāmo ñātiko, so eva nātiko. So kira gāmo yesaṃ santako, tesaṃ pubbapurisena attano ñātīnaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvena nivesito, tena ‘‘nātiko’’ti paññāyittha. Atha pacchā tattha dvīhi dāyādehi dvidhā vibhajitvā paribhutto. Tenāha ‘‘dvinnaṃ cūḷapitimahāpitiputtānaṃ dve gāmā’’ti. Giñjakā vuccanti iṭṭhakā, giñjakāhiyeva kato āvasatho giñjakāvasatho. Tasmiṃ kira padese mattikā sakkharamarumbavālikādīhi asammissā akaṭhinā saṇhā sukhumā, tāya katāni kulālabhājanānipi silāmayāni viya daḷhāni, tasmā te upāsakā tāya mattikāya dīghaputhulaiṭṭhakā kāretvā tāhi ṭhapetvā dvārabāhavātapānakavāṭatulāyo sesaṃ sabbaṃ dabbasambhārena vinā iṭṭhakāhi eva pāsādaṃ kāresuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘iṭṭhakāhevā’’tiādi.
「Gosiṅgasālavanadāyanti」:指得名「牛角沙罗林」的那片受保护森林。「Jeṭṭhakarukkhassāti」(最上树):指那片森林中最突出、最具优势的沙罗树。「Sāmaggirasanti」(和合味):指和合等功德,即远离之乐。在《上分五十》的《随烦恼经》(《中部》3.237-238)中,讲说的是凡夫时期的状况;而此《小牛角经》则讲说漏尽者时期的状况。的确,那些大长老虽已作所应作,但他们为现法乐住的利益,为令后人随学,同时增修更殊胜的远离,体验着和合之味而安住于彼。「Tadā」(那时):指开示《随烦恼经》之时。「Te」(他们):指以阿那律为首的那些善男子。「Laddhassādā」(得味):指通过渐次观修而证得的滋味。观修持续进行时,能带来前后愈益殊胜的差别,并带来极殊胜的喜与悦。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
Gosiṅgasālavanadāyanti gosiṅgasālavananti laddhanāmaṃ rakkhitaṃ araññaṃ. Jeṭṭhakarukkhassāti vanappatibhūtassa sālarukkhassa. Sāmaggirasanti samaggabhāvādiguṇaṃ vivekasukhaṃ. Uparipaṇṇāsake upakkilesasutte (ma. ni. 3.237-238) puthujjanakālo kathito, idha cūḷagosiṅgasutte khīṇāsavakālo kathito. Katakiccāpi hi te mahātherā attano diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṃ paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjanañca sampassantā paramañca vivekaṃ anubrūhantā sāmaggirasaṃ anubhavamānā tattha viharanti. Tadāti tasmiṃ upakkilesasuttadesanākāle. Teti anuruddhappamukhā kulaputtā. Laddhassādāti vipassanāya vīthipaṭipattiyā adhigatassādā. Vipassanā hi pubbenāparaṃ visesaṃ āvahantī pavattamānā sātisayaṃ pītisomanassaṃ āvahati. Tenāha bhagavā –
每当以正智观察诸蕴的生灭时,他便获得喜与欣悦,智者以此了知甘露。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ;
“Laddhapatiṭṭhā”(得安住):指通过证得道果而获得安住。若证得道果,便是在教法中获得了安住;若非如此,则未得安住。显示巴利原文
Labhati pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 374);
舍利弗与目犍连虽同为大弟子,但为彰显他们作为上首弟子的殊胜之处,故特别单独标出“法将、大目犍连长老”等。正如在一般称呼中,有殊胜之处者也会被单独提及,例如“婆罗门们来了,婆私吒也来了”。而且,在那些被单独列出者之中,所谓“八十位大弟子”这一数目,无论少说或多说,皆非精确的统计。“Antamaso”(至少):这是就其作为法库侍者、亲近侍者的身份而言。“Anīkā”(军):指象军,即象群。黑狮子多为群居,故说“如离群的黑狮子”;鬃狮子则通常独来独往。“Vātacchinno valāhako viyā”(如被风吹散的雨云):如同高山顶上巨大的雨云被风吹散后所留下的云片。“Tesaṃ paggaṇhanato”(为了提振他们):正如饥饿者对食物、口渴者对饮水、受寒者对温暖、受热者对清凉、受苦者对快乐会生起渴望一样;同样,世尊见到憍赏弥的比丘们互相争执后,转向那些在别处和合共住的比丘们,心想:“这三位善男子可成为显示巴利原文
Laddhapatiṭṭhā maggaphalādhigamanena. Sati hi maggaphalādhigame sāsane patiṭṭhā laddhā nāma hoti, no aññathā.
那片森林由森林主人派人守护,是受保护、受看管的林丛,不像大森林等那样无人看管。“Jeṭṭhakarukkhassāti”(最上树):指森林中最突出的沙罗树。为自身利益而持守戒律等,这是自爱,并非那种尚未断除贪爱的人,故说“求自己利益者”。因此说“若有人……”等等。“破坏”就是指毁灭。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ sāriputtamoggallānāpi mahāsāvakapariyāpannāva, aggasāvakabhāvena pana nesaṃ visesadassanatthaṃ ‘‘dhammasenāpatimahāmoggallānattheresu vā’’ti visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Satipi hi sāmaññayoge visesavanto visuṃ gayhanti yathā ‘‘brāhmaṇā āgatā, vāsiṭṭhopi āgato’’ti. Tesu pana visuṃ gahitesupi ‘‘asītimahāsāvakesū’’ti asītiggahaṇaṃ appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanupagaṃ na hotīti. Antamasoti idaṃ dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa upaṭṭhākabhāvena āsannacāritāya vuttaṃ. Anīkāti hatthānīkā, hatthānīkato hatthisamūhatoti attho. Kāḷasīho yebhuyyena yūthacaroti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘yūthā nissaṭo kāḷasīho viyā’’ti. Kesarī pana ekacarova. Vātacchinno valāhako viyāti vātacchinno pabbatakūṭappamāṇo valāhakacchedo viya. Tesaṃ paggaṇhanatoti yathā nāma jighacchitassa bhojane, pipāsitassa pānīye, sītena phuṭṭhassa uṇhe, uṇhena phuṭṭhassa sīte, dukkhitassa sukhe abhiruci uppajjati, evamevaṃ bhagavato kosambake bhikkhū aññamaññaṃ vivādāpanne disvā apare samaggāvāsaṃ vasante āvajjitassa ime tayo kulaputtā āpāthaṃ āgamiṃsu, atha ne paggaṇhitukāmo upasaṅkami, evāyaṃ paṭipattianukkamena kosambakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vinayanupāyo hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ paggaṇhanato’’ti. Eteneva pacchimajanataṃ anukampanatoti idampi kāraṇaṃ ekadesena saṃvaṇṇitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ukkaṃsitvāti yathābhūtehi guṇehi sampahaṃsanena visesetvā visiṭṭhe katvā pasaṃsāvasena cetaṃ āmeḍitavacanaṃ.
“弱人”指智慧薄弱、未闻佛法的凡夫。“那些”指在出身等方面所显现的神变。“以袈裟库覆藏”即如同用袈裟作内室将神变隐藏起来。仅披袈裟并不能隐藏佛陀的威力,但世尊心想“莫让任何人知道这是佛陀的威力”,便以那样的神通变化将其遮盖后离去,故如此说。因此说“以不为人知的形貌而去”。显示巴利原文
Taṃ araññaṃ rakkhati vanasāminā āṇatto. Rakkhitagopitaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ, na mahāvanādi viya apariggahitaṃ. Sīlādippabhedāya attatthāya paṭipannā attakāmā, na apariccattasinehāti āha ‘‘attano hitaṃ kāmayamānā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi. Bhindeyyāti vināseyya.
“Dubbalamanussā”(智慧薄弱的人):指智慧薄弱、没有见识的凡夫。“Tāni”(那些):指在出身等方面生起的神变。“Cīvaragabbhena paṭicchādetvā”(用袈裟内室隐藏起来之后):意思是仿佛将其藏于名为袈裟的内室中。仅披袈裟并不能遮盖佛陀的威力。然而世尊以那样的神通意欲,心想“莫让任何人知道这佛陀的威力”,将其隐藏之后才离去,故经中如此说。正因为如此,才说“他以不为人知的模样去了”。显示巴利原文
Dubbalamanussāti paññāya dubbalā aviddasuno manussā. Tānīti abhijātiādīsu uppannapāṭihāriyāni. Cīvaragabbhena paṭicchādetvāti cīvarasaṅkhāte ovarake nigūhitvā viya. Na hi cīvarapārupanamattena buddhānubhāvo paṭicchanno hoti. ‘‘Mā sudha kocimaṃ buddhānubhāvaṃ aññāsī’’ti pana tathārūpena iddhābhisaṅkhārena taṃ chādetvā gato bhagavā tathā vutto. Tenāha ‘‘aññātakavesena agamāsī’’ti.
“Abhikkamathā”(请过来)一词,是面向对方、依循法仪而说的,因此注释为“从这边过来吧”。诸佛的身体本就如极纯净的宝石般庄严,没有任何需要去除的污垢,那世尊为何还要洗足呢?为了解释此疑,接着才说“诸佛……”等。显示巴利原文
Abhikkamathāti padaṃ abhimukhabhāvena vidhimukhena vadatīti āha ‘‘ito āgacchathā’’ti. Buddhānaṃ kāyo nāma suvisuddhajātimaṇi viya sobhano, kiñci malaṃ apanetabbaṃ natthi, kimatthaṃ bhagavā pāde pakkhālesīti āha ‘‘buddhāna’’ntiādi.
326 “Anuruddhā”(阿那律们)一词,是以单数代复数的省略方式表达的,因为也意欲涵盖 Virūpekasesa(阿那律等)之意;如此一来,用复数形式来表述也就合理了。“威仪堪忍”:由于身体轻快,四种威仪都能安乐地运行。“维持生命”:具有维持特性的命根,维系着这副身体机器,令它安乐地运转。“一勺粥或一匙乞食”:这是依循摩伽罗注释的方式,指靠混合食物来维持生命而说的。因此,注释中说“这是在询问乞食的行法”。显示巴利原文
326.Anuruddhāti vā ekasesanayena vuttaṃ virūpekasesassapi icchitabbattā, evañca katvā bahuvacananiddesopi samatthito hoti. Iriyāpatho khamatīti sarīrassa lahuṭṭhānatāya catubbidhopi iriyāpatho sukhappavattiko. Jīvitaṃ yāpetīti yāpanālakkhaṇaṃ jīvitaṃ imaṃ sarīrayantaṃ yāpeti sukhena pavatteti. Uḷuṅkayāguṃ vā kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ vāti idaṃ makaravuttiyā missakabhattena yāpanaṃ vattanti katvā vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bhikkhācāravattaṃ pucchatī’’ti.
“相互融合”:虽然这两堆东西在究竟意义上是有差别的,但对多数人而言,其差别很难辨识,就如乳汁与水交融那般,完全合为一体而存在。因此说“没有分离,仿佛达成了同一体”。展现出慈爱样貌的眼睛就是“慈眼”。“可爱的”:“慈”的意思,就是被人喜爱,或值得被喜爱。世尊为了询问他们和合共住的唯一原因,而说“那么,是怎样呢?”等,因此注释说“’怎样(kathaṃ)’是对原因的询问”。也就是说,在询问他们之间那种充满慈爱的身业等,是如何在彼此面前展现的。正如下文中,长老们回答:“尊者,我们是这样的……”那样。显示巴利原文
Aññamaññaṃ saṃsandatīti satipi ubhayesaṃ kalāpānaṃ paramatthato bhede pacurajanehi duviññeyyanānattaṃ khīrodakasammoditaṃ accantameva saṃsaṭṭhaṃ viya hutvā tiṭṭhati. Tenāha ‘‘visuṃ na hoti, ekattaṃ viya upetī’’ti. Piyabhāvadīpanāni cakkhūni piyacakkhūni. Piyāyati, piyāyitabboti vā piyoti. Samaggavāsassa yaṃ ekantakāraṇaṃ, taṃ pucchanto bhagavā ‘‘yathā kathaṃ panā’’tiādimāhāti ‘‘kathanti kāraṇapucchā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo nesaṃ mettāsahitānaṃyeva kammādīnaṃ aññamaññasmiṃ paccupaṭṭhānākāro, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘katha’’nti pucchā. Tathā hi parato ‘‘evaṃ kho mayaṃ, bhante’’tiādinā therehi vissajjanaṃ kathitaṃ.
「有慈」:意为“有慈”,指身业。「显露」即公开为之;「隐秘」即不公开为之。若对某人生起了慈的身业,在他面前做,便是显露;在他背后做,便是隐秘。因此说“显露及隐秘,即当面与背后”。「其他」指在背后所做的身业与语业。为了展开解释前面“在那里”等简略所说的含义,才接着说“也就是……”等。通过扫地等事,照料应被维护的场所。「同样地」:正如前面所说当面行慈身业那样。诸如“您还堪忍吗?”这样的寒暄,是「欢喜语」。为了融洽无间、以款待方式进行的交谈,是「款待语」。像“啊!那时长老曾这样教诲我,这样指导我!”这类值得日后忆念的话,或者与六和合法相关的谈论,是「忆念语」。放下经文的字句,通过解释其义理来谈论戒等法义的交谈,是「法语」。以音调讽诵经文,是「声诵」。询问想要了解的义理,是「问问题」。对所问加以解答,是「回答问题」。「如此作意者」:意思是如此地作意,如此地施与慈心。显示巴利原文
Mittaṃ etassa atthīti mettaṃ, kāyakammaṃ. Āvīti pakāsaṃ. Rahoti appakāsaṃ. Yañhi uddissa mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ paccupaṭṭhapeti, taṃ tassa sammukhā ce, pakāsaṃ hoti, parammukhā ce, appakāsaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhā ceva parammukhā cā’’ti. Itarānīti parammukhā kāyavacīkammāni. ‘‘Tatthā’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sammajjanādivasena paṭijaggitabbayuttaṃ ṭhānaṃ vā. Tathevāti yathā sammukhā kate mettākāyakamme vuttaṃ, tatheva . ‘‘Kacci khamanīya’’nti evamādikā kathā sammodanīyakathā. Yathā parehi saddhiṃ attano chiddaṃ na hoti, tathā paṭisanthāravasena pavattā kathā paṭisanthārakathā. ‘‘Aho tadā therena mayhaṃ dinno ovādo, dinnā anusāsanī’’ti evaṃ kālantare saritabbayuttā, chasāraṇīyapaṭisaṃyuttā vā kathā sāraṇīyakathā. Suttapadaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa atthaniddesavasena sīlādidhammapaṭisaṃyuttā kathā dhammīkathā. Sarena suttassa uccāraṇaṃ sarabhaññaṃ. Pañhassa ñātuṃ icchitassa atthassa pucchanaṃ pañhapucchanaṃ. Tassa yathāpucchitassaādisanaṃ pañhavissajjanaṃ. Evaṃ samannāharatoti evaṃ manasikaroto, evaṃ mettaṃ upasaṃharatoti attho.
「多种」:因为无法将其合为一物,故而是多种多样的。「以利益为义」:即如待己身般,彼此怀有利乐之心。「以无间为义」:即彼此之间没有间隔、没有分裂。「以无诤为义」:即没有冲突、和合的状态。「以和合为义」:即融洽共处的状态。「涂地」:是指用厚薄不同的泥浆涂抹地面。「洗衣」:是指清洗自己的袈裟。「或涂地」:是指为自己居住的叶屋涂抹地面。显示巴利原文
Ekato kātuṃ na sakkā, tasmā nānā. Hitaṭṭhenāti attano viya aññamaññassa hitabhāvena. Nirantaraṭṭhenāti antarābhāvena bhedābhāvena. Aviggahaṭṭhenāti avirodhabhāvena. Samaggaṭṭhenāti sahitabhāvena. Paribhaṇḍaṃ katvāti bahalatanumattikālepehi limpetvā. Cīvaraṃ vā dhovantīti attano cīvaraṃ vā dhovanti. Paribhaṇḍaṃ vāti attano paṇṇasālāya paribhaṇḍaṃ vā karonti.
327 327.「正是相违」:在此也应将“多半”一词带进来,联系起来理解。「他们的不放逸相」:即他们不放逸的本性。「诸阿那律,你们是否和合」:在这里,“vo”只是一个没有实际意义的语气助词,或者是一个表示主体的词,应当理解为“你们”的意思。「突然落下的钵」:指犹如从匣中骤然掉出的钵。显示巴利原文
327.Paṭiviruddhā evāti etthāpi ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tesaṃ appamādalakkhaṇanti tesaṃ appamajjanasabhāvaṃ. Kacci pana vo anuruddhā samaggāti etthāpi voti nipātamattaṃ, paccattavacanaṃ vā, kacci tumheti evamattho veditabbo. Samuggapātinti samuggapuṭasadisaṃ pātiṃ.
“于叶屋内外的清扫,令场地洁净”:这是履行应尽的义务。“仅就份量而言”:指仅取维持自身生命所需的那一份食物。“放入后”:指投入钵中之后。“仅量”:指仅仅是维持自身生命所需的那个分量。“如所说方式而舍”:指依照经中所说法方式舍弃。显示巴利原文
Paṇṇasālāyaṃ anto bahi ca sammajjanena sodhitaṅgaṇatā vattapaṭipatti. Paṭivisamattamevāti attano yāpanapaṭivisamattameva. Osāpetvāti pakkhipitvā. Pamāṇamevāti attano yāpanapamāṇameva. Vuttanayena jahitvāti pāḷiyaṃ vuttanayena jahitvā.
“手与手互相交织”:指用自己的手紧紧握住他人的手,从而联结起来。“能跨越”:因凭此能到达他处,故称跨越者,此处即指手。手即是跨越者,故名“手跨越者”,即以此手跨越者。显示巴利原文
Hatthena hatthaṃ saṃsibbantāti attano hatthena itarassa hatthaṃ daḷhaggahaṇavasena bandhantā. Vilaṅgheti desantaraṃ pāpeti etenāti vilaṅghako, hattho. Hattho eva vilaṅghako hatthavilaṅghako, tena hatthavilaṅghakena.
“使其圆满无间”:指在三日之中,令听法持续进行而不中断。此即“每隔五日”等语。于第五日举行者,称为“五曰一会”。此为世尊所询问的阿那律尊者所说。所谓“唯于放逸处”,是指在他人的放逸之处。为令“唯于放逸处”之义更为明了,才接着说“对他人而言……”。“戏论生起之处”,即说话闲谈生起之处,因展开散漫的谈论而于业处上放逸。于此之中,长老亦展示了自己已达顶点的不放逸之相,说道:“尊者!我等不从事与业处相违之事。”而所说“除这段时间外”,是因那时他们未受用住等至而说的。显示巴利原文
Taṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvāti taṃ tīsupi divasesu dhammassavanaṃ pavattanavasena akhaṇḍikaṃ katvā. Etanti ‘‘pañcāhikaṃ kho panā’’tiādivacanaṃ. Pañcame pañcame ahani bhavatīti pañcāhikaṃ. Bhagavatā pucchitena anuruddhattherena. Pamādaṭṭhānesuyevāti aññesaṃ pamādaṭṭhānesuyeva. ‘‘Pamādaṭṭhānesuyevā’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘aññesañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Papañcakaraṇaṭṭhānānīti kathāpapañcassa karaṇaṭṭhānāni vissaṭṭhakathāpavattanena kammaṭṭhāne pamajjanaṭṭhānāni. Tatthāpi ‘‘mayaṃ, bhante, kammaṭṭhānaviruddhaṃ na paṭipajjāmā’’ti sikhāppattaṃ attano appamādalakkhaṇaṃ thero dasseti. Ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ muñcitvāti pana idaṃ tadā vihārasamāpattīnaṃ vaḷañjābhāvena vuttaṃ.
328 「足以成就圣知见殊胜」:这是就禅那而言,所以才这样说。长老自身行道正善,为了让大师心生欢喜,而且这一殊胜证悟在大师面前已是现前可见,因此长老说:“尊者!我们怎会没有可能呢?”「Yāvadeva」是“只要”的意思,指那么一段时间:或一日之中的某时分,或一整夜,乃至七天。显示巴利原文
328. Jhānassa adhippetattā ‘‘alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso’’icceva vuttaṃ. Attano sammāpaṭipannatāya satthu cittārādhanatthaṃ tassa ca visesādhigamassa satthu paccakkhabhāvato thero ‘‘kiñhi no siyā, bhante’’ti āha. Yāvadevāti yattakaṃ kālaṃ ekaṃ divasabhāgaṃ vā sakalarattiṃ vā yāva satta vā divase.
329 「彻底超越」(samatikkamāya):即正确地完全超越。因为当证得更高的殊胜时,较低的禅那便可称为“已超越”和“已止息”。故说「为了止息」(paṭippassaddhiyā)。应当了知,「圣知见殊胜」(ñāṇadassanaviseso)是以原因借代而说。「于有受之乐」(vedayitasukhato),指与感受相应的禅那乐,或果乐。「无受之乐」(avedayitasukha)则如涅槃之乐,是无感受的乐。而且,“无受之乐”只是就比喻而言,实际上那里无触、无想、无心,全无任何心与心所。虽然那时色法仍在相续,但因为无心,彻底脱离了一切诸行的苦,所以灭尽定被称为更寂静、更殊胜。因此说:“无受之乐是更寂静、更殊胜的。”由此又说“从此”等。显示巴利原文
329.Samatikkamāyāti sammadeva atikkamanāya. Sati hi upari visesādhigame heṭṭhimajjhānaṃ samatikkantaṃ nāma hoti paṭippassaddhi ca. Tenāha ‘‘paṭippassaddhiyā’’ti. Ñāṇadassanavisesoti kāraṇūpacārena vuttoti veditabbo. Vedayitasukhatoti vedanāsahitajjhānasukhato vā phalasukhato vā. Avedayitasukhanti nibbānasukhaṃ viya vedanārahitaṃ sukhaṃ. Avedayitasukhanti ca nidassanamattametaṃ, taṃ pana aphassaṃ asaññaṃ acetananti sabbacittacetasikarahitameva. Tato ca satipi rūpadhammappavattiyaṃ tassa acetanattā sabbaso saṅkhāradukkhavirahitatāya santatarā paṇītatarā ca nirodhasamāpattīti vuccate. Tenāha ‘‘avedayitasukhaṃ santataraṃ paṇītataraṃ hotī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imamhā cā’’tiādi.
330 为了他们的和合、利益与安乐,世尊才这样说法,因为这正契他们的意乐。「告知」(anusāvetvā),是令其随顺、正确地了知的意思。另有版本作“anusaṃsāvetvā”,意义相同。「从那里返回」(tato paṭinivattitvā):即了知世尊此时乐于独处的心意,领受了大师的心意之后,从“你们就停留在这里”这一告别之处返回。「出家等」(pabbajjādīni)中的“等”字,包含了具足戒、清净、头陀行、业处修习、禅那、解脱、等至、如实知见、道修习、果证悟等。「虽已证得」(adhigantvāpi):其中的“pi”字表示连同依据那些所证得的也都一并包含。对于「厌嫌述说自己的功德」(attano guṇakathāya aṭṭiyamānā),此句的连贯意思是:依世尊而证悟之后,在有关法的事务中,为了使大师不感疲倦,对世尊显而易见的功德叙述也感到厌嫌。「诸天」(devatā):指获得各种等至的天神。「我口膛锁结」(mukhaṃ me sajjanti),意思是我的口已不适合说话,在言说上已无能为力。显示巴利原文
330.Sāmaggirasānisaṃsameva nesaṃ bhagavā kathesi ajjhāsayānukūlattā tassa. Anusāvetvāti anupagamanavasena sammadeva ārocetvā. ‘‘Anusaṃsāvetvā’’ti vā pāṭho, so evattho. Tato paṭinivattitvāti etarahi bhagavato ekavihāre ajjhāsayoti satthu manaṃ gaṇhantā ‘‘idheva tiṭṭhathā’’ti vissajjitaṭṭhānato nivattitvā . Pabbajjādīnīti ādi-saddena upasampadā-visuddhi-dhutakammaṭṭhānānuyoga-jhānavimokkha-samāpatti-ñāṇadassana-maggabhāvanā-phalasacchikiriyādike saṅgaṇhāti. Adhigantvāpīti pi-saddena yathādhigatānampi. Attano guṇakathāya aṭṭiyamānāti bhagavantaṃ nissāya adhigantvāpi dhammādhikaraṇaṃ satthuvihesābhāvadīpane bhagavato pākaṭaguṇānaṃ kathāya aṭṭiyamānāpīti yojanā. Devatāti taṃtaṃsamāpattilābhiniyo devatā. Mukhaṃ me sajjanti mukhaṃ me kathane samatthaṃ, kathane yogyanti attho.
331 「如是来」(Evaṃ āgato),即如《阿吒那胝经》中所说那样而来。「缠绕」(paliveṭhente),指被催问时。「悭吝」(maccharāyantī),指他不能忍受向世尊述说自己的功德,而生起悭吝,他这样想。这是记着而说。显示巴利原文
331.Evaṃ āgatoti evaṃ āṭānāṭiyasutte āgato. Paliveṭhenteti codente. Maccharāyantīti attano guṇānaṃ bhagavatopi ārocanaṃ asahamānā maccharāyantīti so cintetīti katvā vuttaṃ.
01 「他们的利得」(Tesaṃ lābhā):指那些跋耆王和跋耆国住民获得人身、住在适宜之地等利得,以及三位善男子得以见佛、礼敬、布施、听法等利得。应理解为“善得的利得”。「应忆念净信之心」(pasannacittaṃ anussareyyā):指对那个家族在戒等功德上生起净信之后而忆念。正如所说:“诸比丘,我说对于这些比丘的忆念,也是有众多利益的。”(《如是语》104;《相应部》5.184)显示巴利原文
01Tesaṃlābhāti tesaṃ vajjirājūnaṃ vajjiraṭṭhavāsīnañca manussattaṃ, patirūpadesavāsādiko, bhagavato tiṇṇañca kulaputtānaṃ dassanavandanadānadhammassavanādayo lābhā. Suladdhā lābhāti yojanā. Pasannacittaṃ anussareyyāti taṃ kulañhetaṃ sīlādiguṇe cittaṃ pasādetvā anussareyya. Vuttaṃ tesaṃ ‘‘anussaraṇampāhaṃ, bhikkhave, tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahūpakāraṃ vadāmī’’ti (itivu. 104; saṃ. ni. 5.184).
至此,《小牛角经》注疏中对隐微意义的阐明,就全部完成了。显示巴利原文
Cūḷagosiṅgasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.
二、《大牛角经》注疏显示巴利原文
2. Mahāgosiṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
332 「Kocidevā」是指:不管哪一个村庄。在牛角娑罗林周围,会有一个村庄作为托钵的去处,但由于并不固定,因此这里没有指定具体的托钵村,只是说明了他们居住的地方,所以这部经就叫作“以阿兰若为因缘”。「一切处」:指在天界和人界。「由行持坚固者」:指那些在教法中修持坚固、使之稳固的人。「因听闻究竟而生」:意思是听闻了含摄四圣谛的佛法,达到究竟,而在圣种中诞生。声闻弟子们通过这样听闻佛法,成就了证悟与多闻。正如太阳以其光辉功德的辉光驱散愚痴的黑暗,月亮以其令人愉悦、可爱又清凉的功德特质平息烦恼的炽热,大海则以其甚深、稳固、宽广又具足种种功德的性相,而安住于法性之中。由于功德广大,这位长老为人所知;而功德的广大,也可以按经典中所教导的方法来了知。为了详细说明这点,所以说了“不仅仅是”等文。《狮子吼经》就是《中部》里的《大狮子吼经》;《长老问经》就是《经集·八颂品》里的《舍利弗经》;《长老狮子吼经》则是这位长老在各国游行时,当着世尊的面所说的那部狮子吼经。「出家」:指这位长老在大批亲……显示巴利原文
332.Kocidevāti gosiṅgasālavanasāmantato niviṭṭhesu yo koci gāmo gocaragāmo bhavissati, tasmā anibaddhabhāvato gocaragāmo na gahito, vasanaṭṭhānameva paridīpitaṃ, tato eva araññanidānakaṃ nāmetaṃ. Sabbatthāti devaloke manussaloke ca. Thirakārakehīti sāsane thirabhāvakārakehi. Savanante jātattāti catusaccagabbhassa dhammassavanassa pariyosāne ariyāya jātiyā jātattā. Yathā paṭivedhabāhusaccaṃ ijjhati, tathā dhammassa savanato sāvakā . Sūriyo viya bhāsuraguṇaraṃsitāya mohandhakāravidhamanato. Cando viya ramaṇīyamanoharasītalaguṇatāya kilesapariḷāhavūpasamato. Sāgaro viya gambhīrathiravipulānekaguṇatāya ṭhitadhammasabhāvato. Guṇamahantatāya therassa abhiññātatā, guṇamahantatā ca suttesu āgatanayeneva ñātabbāti taṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sīhanādasuttanti majjhimanikāye āgataṃ mahāsīhanādasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 1.146). Therapañhasuttanti suttanipāte aṭṭhakavagge āgataṃ sāriputtasuttaṃ (su. ni. 961-981). Therasīhanādasuttanti imassa ca therassa janapadacārikāya satthu sammukhā sīhanādasuttaṃ. Abhinikkhamananti therasseva mahatā ñātiparivaṭṭena mahatā ca bhogaparivaṭṭena saha gharāvāsapariccāgo abhinikkhamanaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Yadidanti nipāto, yo ayanti attho.
“摄受了大智慧的比丘”:据说尊者舍利弗长老的随从比丘们也全是大智慧者,因为众生依界性而聚合。至于“自身具备神通”等,也是同样的道理。而此义当由《界相应经》(Saṃ. Ni. 2.99)阐明:世尊在灵鹫山病卧时,舍利弗、目犍连等弟子围护在旁。世尊看见他们各自与随从一同经行,便对比丘们说:“诸比丘,你们看见舍利弗与众多比丘一起经行吗?”“是的,世尊。”“诸比丘,所有这些比丘都是大智慧者。”应当这样详细展开。显示巴利原文
Mahāpaññe bhikkhū gahetvāti āyasmato kira sāriputtattherassa parivārabhikkhūpi mahāpaññā eva ahesuṃ. Dhātuso hi sattā saṃsandanti. Sayaṃ iddhimātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ panattho dhātusaṃyuttena (saṃ. ni. 2.99) dīpetabbo – gijjhakūṭapabbate gilānaseyyāya nisinno bhagavā ārakkhatthāya parivāretvā vasantesu sāriputtamoggallānādīsu ekamekaṃ attano parisāya saddhiṃ caṅkamantaṃ voloketvā bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, sāriputtaṃ sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ caṅkamantanti. Evaṃ, bhante. Sabbe kho ete, bhikkhave, bhikkhū mahāpaññā’’ti sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ.
“林际”:指靠近林子的边缘。“如云之色”:即深蓝色。这是针对如同从大海腹中涌出一般前来侍奉的情景而说的。所谓“东方铁围山顶”,是就光芒遍满的状态而言,犹如在铁围山顶附近,并非月亮真的运行于铁围山顶。若真是那样,日月的光芒便会照到世界中间的地狱里去了。实际上,日月是依高度在铁围山的中央运行。因为娑罗花的光辉极其红艳,所以说“如同倾注了虫胶液一般”。“如同近前歌唱一般”:意思是如同为了亲近承事而前来歌唱一般。他心中思惟:“今天是为了禅那等至的快乐呢,还是为了谈论佛法的快乐,或是为了说法的快乐?”显示巴利原文
Vananteti upavanante. Meghavaṇṇāyāti nīlābhāya. Samuddakucchito uggacchantassa viya upaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Cakkavāḷapabbatamatthakasamīpe ābhāpharaṇavasena pavattiyā ‘‘pācīnacakkavāḷapabbatamatthake’’ti vuttaṃ, na cakkavāḷapabbatamatthake candamaṇḍalassa vicaraṇato. Tathā sati lokantarikanirayesupi candimasūriyānaṃ ābhā phareyya. Ubbedhavasena hi cakkavāḷapabbatassa vemajjhato candimasūriyā vicaranti. Sālakusumapabhānaṃ atirattatāya vuttaṃ ‘‘lākhārasena siñcamānaṃ viyā’’ti. Upagāyamānā viyāti payirupāsanavasena upecca gāyamānā viya . Kāya nu kho ajja ratiyāti ajja jhānasamāpattiratiyā eva nu kho, udāhu dhammasākacchāratiyā dhammadesanāratiyāti cintesi.
如同两轮明月,具有极致美丽的光辉;如同两轮太阳,具有极为清净光耀的功德威容;如同两头六牙象王,有大威神力;如同两头狮子,具足威德;如同两头老虎,行持勇健不退。“一切已遍开敷”:即所有花朵完全盛开。显示巴利原文
Dve candamaṇḍalāni viya paramasobhaggappattāya kantiyā. Dve sūriyamaṇḍalāni viya ativiya suvisuddhasamujjalāya guṇavibhūtiyā. Dve chaddantanāgarājāno viya mahānubhāvatāya. Dve sīhā viya tejussadatāya. Dve byagghā viya anolīnavuttitāya. Sabbapāliphullamevāti sabbameva samantato vikasitaṃ.
333 “言语所行处”:言语的活动在此处生起、进行,故称言语所行处,即指那听闻活动之处。“rāmaṇeyyakaṃ”即“ramaṇīyameva”(极悦乐)。“Ujjaṅgala”指粗糙、坚硬之地。因从过失中离去,转ta音为na音,故称“无过云”(dosinā)。“天香”:此香犹如天上之香。“天”(dibbā):生于天界者,故称为天。两位长老即舍利弗长老与阿难陀长老。阿难陀长老或许尚有所执取(因未漏尽),舍利弗长老又是如何?此执取非基于世俗情感的依恋,而是出于对德行的敬重,故非过失。显示巴利原文
333. Kathā upacarati pavattati etthāti kathāupacāro, savanūpacāro padeso, taṃ kathāupacāraṃ. Ramaṇīyameva rāmaṇeyyakaṃ. Ujjaṅgaleti lūkhapadese kaṭhinapadese. Dosehi itā apagatāti dosinā ta-kārassa na-kāraṃ katvā. Dibbā maññe gandhāti devaloke gandhā viya. Divi bhavāti dibbā. Dve therāti sāriputtattheraānandattherā. Ānandatthero tāva mamāyatu akhīṇāsavabhāvato, sāriputtatthero kathanti? Na idaṃ mamāyanaṃ gehassitapemavasena, atha kho guṇabhattivasenāti nāyaṃ doso.
“允许问”:即基于许可的提问,为获得许可而发起的询问。其中,因为即使对于不如法之事,上座既已许可,他人便不能拒绝,因此这种许可必须被求取,所以应当从僧团中最年少者开始征求许可。因而说“这就叫做允许问”等。“从年少者开始”:即从最下座者开始。所谓“辩才”(paṭibhāna),是其能显现、能现起所期望的意义,即称辩才。若仅由智慧片面者所说,则不达顶峰与圆满;若与一切知智相应,则达顶峰与圆满。为以此喻说明所说之义,故说“譬如”等。其中,“案件”(aṭṭo):因敌人为此而痛苦、受苦,故称案件,即需要裁决之事。“村主”:他生于何村,即为该村之治理者。“地方主”:他生于何地,即为该地之治理者。“大断事大臣”:该地所属王国,在其王都中的大断事大臣。“将军”:是该臣子所属国王的将军。“副王”亦同此理。然此处仅按一般情况而言,应视作与所喻之义相符。因事情已被具备裁决资格者裁决过,故不会前显示巴利原文
Anumatiyā pucchā anumatipucchā, anumatiggahaṇatthaṃ pucchanaṃ. Tattha yasmā adhammikampi vuddhassa anumatiṃ itaro paṭikkhipituṃ na labhati, tena sā anujānitabbāva hoti, tasmā saṅghakhuddakato paṭṭhāya anumati pucchitabbā. Tenāha ‘‘anumatipucchā nāmesā’’tiādi. Khuddakato paṭṭhāyāti kaṇiṭṭhato paṭṭhāya. Paṭibhāti upaṭṭhātīti paṭibhānaṃ, yathādhippeto attho, taṃ paṭibhānaṃ. Sikhāppattā vepullappattā na bhavissati padesañāṇe ṭhitehi bhāsitattā. Sikhāppattā vepullappattā bhavissati sabbaññutaññāṇena saṃsanditattā. Vuttamevatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paccatthikā aṭṭiyanti dukkhāyanti etenāti aṭṭo, vinicchitabbavohāro. Gāmabhojakanti yasmiṃ gāme so uppanno, taṃ gāmabhojakaṃ. Janapadabhojakanti yasmiṃ janapade so uppanno, taṃ janapadabhojakaṃ. Mahāvinicchayaamaccanti yasmiṃ rajje so janapado, tassa rājadhāniyaṃ mahāvinicchayaamaccaṃ. Senāpatinti yassa rañño so amacco, tassa senāpatiṃ. Tathā uparājanti . Idaṃ panettha pakaticārittavasena vuttaṃ upameyyatthānurūpatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aparāparaṃ na sañcarati vinicchayanārahena vinicchitabhāvato.
“圣典”(pāḷi):因其能令人觉悟戒等殊胜、微妙的意义,故称“显扬”;又因诸佛等以本性语言宣说,故其语句相续亦称为“显扬”;即指教法。前义与后义相连接,即称为“连结”(anusandhi)。就意义而言,诸经典语句亦有连结,此连结依前后连结、问连结、意乐连结、如义连结而有四种。各个教说之间的前后连接,即称为“前后”。应当依圣典、依连结、依前后,分别加以联系。所谓“已摄持”,即是依音节与义理,逐次精密把握,亦即通过学习和反复反问而用心牢持。渴望出离轮回之苦者所应听闻的,即是“所闻”(suta),亦即教法;能持守此所闻者,即是“多闻持法者”(sutadhara)。若人成为多闻持法者,所闻便安住于彼,并且善得安立,因此说他是“所闻之器”。故而说“因为凡是……”等。“积集”:即使一字一音亦不坏失而聚集;所闻之积集,此人便成为“闻法积集”者(sutasannicayo)。“深入之后而住立”:即进入之后而安住。显示巴利原文
Pakaṭṭhānaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.22) ukkaṭṭhānaṃ sīlādiatthānaṃ bodhanato, sabhāvaniruttivasena buddhādīhi bhāsitattā ca pakaṭṭhānaṃ vacanappabandhānaṃ āḷīti pāḷi, pariyattidhammo. Purimassa atthassa pacchimena atthena anusandhānaṃ anusandhi. Atthamukhena pana pāḷipadesānampi anusandhi hotiyeva, so ca pubbāparānusandhi-pucchānusandhi-ajjhāsayānusandhi-yathānusandhivasena catubbidho. Taṃtaṃdesanānaṃ pana pubbāparasaṃsandanaṃ pubbāparaṃ. Pāḷivasena anusandhivasena pubbāparavasenāti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Uggahitanti byañjanaso atthaso ca uddhaṃ uddhaṃ gahitaṃ, pariyāpuṇanavasena ceva paripucchāvasena ca hadayena gahitanti attho. Vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi sotabbato sutaṃ, pariyattidhammo, taṃ dhāretīti sutadharo. Yo hi sutadharo, sutaṃ tasmiṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ hoti suppatiṭṭhitaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sutassa ādhārabhūto’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘yassa hī’’tiādi. Ekapadaṃ ekakkharampi avinaṭṭhaṃ hutvā sannicīyatīti sannicayo, sutaṃ sannicayo etasminti sutasannicayo. Ajjhosāyāti anupavisitvā. Tiṭṭhatīti na mussati.
“坚固、娴熟”:即已稳固、娴熟,能够背诵。“不动摇”:即不会翻转、改变。“比对”:即与他人核对比较。“问究”:即通过反复提问而深入理解意义。由于文脉无有间断,如同恒河之流(另有读作“如有分流”的),意为自然安乐地进行。此处并非仅凭语言熟悉一部或部分经典,而是指依品等方式熟习,故说“诵习十经……乃至诵习”。也就是透过观察“十经已诵,十品已诵”等,借助言语加以背诵,这就是它的含义。“意随观”:是以心意反复观察、一一审查思惟。如同色法显现那样显现,即如色法对眼那般,变得极为清晰而呈现。“善通达”:即除去杂乱与纠结,善巧而如实地通达意义。显示巴利原文
Ṭhitā paguṇāti paguṇā vācuggatā. Niccalitanti aparivattitaṃ. Saṃsanditvāti aññehi saṃsanditvā. Samanuggāhitvāti paripucchāvasena atthaṃ ogāhetvā. Pabandhassa vibandhābhāvato gaṅgāsotasadisaṃ, ‘‘bhavaṅgasotasadisa’’nti vā pāṭho, akittimaṃ sukhappavattīti attho. Suttekadesassa suttassa ca vacasā paricayo idha nādhippeto, vaggādivasena pana adhippetoti āha ‘‘suttadasaka…pe… sajjhāyitā’’ti, ‘‘dasa suttāni gatāni, dasa vaggāgatā’’tiādinā sallakkhetvā vācāya sajjhāyitāti attho. Manasā anu anu pekkhitā bhāgaso nijjhāyitā cintitā manasānupekkhitā. Rūpagataṃ viya paññāyatīti rūpagataṃ viya cakkhussa vibhūtaṃ hutvā paññāyati. Suppaṭividdhāti nijjaṭaṃ niggumbaṃ katvā suṭṭhu yāthāvato paṭividdhā.
“句”(pada):因为意义依它而了知,故名为句;它又能开显意义,故称为“文”(byañjana)。因此说:“句即是意义的开显者,故为句文。”因字母圆满,句文得以圆足;此圆足应如此理解,故说“不缺损十种文智”。所谓“另取能难诘者”,即从已确立的经典之外,另取一部与之不相应的经典。“引入其义”:即只审察所取之经的意义。那样的谈论,因义不圆满,故称不圆足。然而,如果只依所确立的经典进行义理解释,即使引入其他经典,也不超出片言只语,这就是“不抹消”,即不毁坏原义。将各个意义善加确定并显示出来,犹如以画笔划出界限。引导更深的意义,如同引水入深渠;若引入浅渠,水便会溢出边界而流失。仅用一词,而以多种方式反复解释,犹如良马步步踏在句点上,以轻快步伐前进。透过这种说法方式,如此谈论在法、义、连结、前后、师承等方面皆悉圆满,故称为圆足。显示巴利原文
Pajjati attho ñāyati etenāti padaṃ, tadeva atthaṃ byañjetīti byañjananti āha ‘‘padameva atthassa byañjanato padabyañjana’’nti. Akkharapāripūriyā padabyañjanassa parimaṇḍalatā, sā pana pāripūrī evaṃ veditabbāti āha ‘‘dasavidhabyañjanabuddhiyo aparihāpetvā’’ti. Aññaṃ upārambhakaranti yathānikkhittasuttato aññaṃ tassa ananulomakaṃ suttaṃ āharati. Tadatthaṃ otāretīti tassa āhaṭasuttasseva atthaṃ vicāreti. Tassa kathā aparimaṇḍalā nāma hoti atthassa aparipuṇṇabhāvato. Yathānikkhittassa suttassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvaseneva suttantarampi ānento bahi ekapadampi na gacchati nāma. Amakkhentoti avināsento. Taṃ taṃ atthaṃ suṭṭhu vavatthitaṃ katvā dassento tulikāya paricchindanto viya. Gambhīrataramatthaṃ gamento gambhīramātikāya udakaṃ pesento viya. Uttānamātikāya hi mariyādaṃ ottharitvā udakaṃ aññathā gaccheyya. Ekaṃyeva padaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi punappunaṃ saṃvaṇṇento padaṃ koṭṭento sindhavājānīyo viya. So hi vaggitāya gatiyā pade padaṃ koṭṭento gacchati. Kathāmaggena tassa kathā parimaṇḍalā nāma hoti dhammato atthato anusandhito pubbāparato ācariyuggahatoti sabbaso paripuṇṇabhāvato.
“无间断地”:即流畅无滞、持续不断。他不过快、不过慢,无有间断、始终一味,随顺会众的心意而说法,这才称为“以流畅的言说而说”,而非其他情况。为显示此义,才说“具足比丘”等。犹如急速摩擦取火棒、或吃烫食一般,是快速说法的例子;而“才抓住又抓取”之类,则是跳过某些内容而说法的例子。因为枯叶堆的缝隙中,有时还能见到蜥蜴活动;同样,某人的义理阐释,在某些地方却全然不见。所谓“跳过”,即是放置不顾。又以“即使有人”等,显示他并非只用单一方式说法。所谓“饿鬼火”,是指被饥渴煎熬的饿鬼口中喷出的火焰。“展开”,即陷入不舒展的状态,如受某种病苦折磨而呻吟一般。“如同哭泣那样”,即发出高声的样子。称为“相续薄弱”,是因为不易持续进行。“住立于师授之方式”:即不舍离师长所教,且完全依师长们解释各部经典的方式、遵循同样的法则去解释,这就是它的意思。“令相续不断”:即依前面所说“不太快、不太慢”等原则,编织成一条无有间断的相续。显示巴利原文
Anuppabandhehīti vissaṭṭhehi āsajjamānehi. Nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikaṃ nirantaraṃ ekarasañca katvā parisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ dhammaṃ kathento vissaṭṭhāya kathāya katheti nāma, na aññathāti dassento ‘‘yo bhikkhū’’tiādimāha. Araṇiṃ manthento viya, uṇhakhādanīyaṃ khādanto viyāti sīghaṃ sīghaṃ kathanassa udāharaṇaṃ, gahitaṃ gahitamevātiādi laṅghetvā kathanassa. Purāṇapaṇṇantaresu hi paripātiyamānagodhā kadāci dissati, evamekaccassa atthavaṇṇanā katthaci na dissati. Ohāyāti ṭhapetvā. Yopītiādinā ekarūpena kathāya akathanaṃ dasseti. Petaggi nijjhāmataṇhikapetassa mukhato niccharaṇakaaggi. Vitthāyatīti appaṭitānatamāpajjati. Kenaci rogena dukkhaṃ patto viya nitthunanto. Kandanto viyāti ukkuṭṭhiṃ karonto viya. Appabandhā nāma hoti sukhena appavattabhāvato. Ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhitoti ācariyuggahaṃ amuñcanto, yathā ca ācariyā taṃ taṃ suttaṃ saṃvaṇṇesuṃ, teneva nayena saṃvaṇṇentoti attho. Acchinnadhāraṃ katvāti ‘‘nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇika’’ntiādinā heṭṭhā vuttanayena avicchinnaṃ kathāpabandhaṃ katvā. Anusayasamugghātāyāti iminā tassā kathāya arahattapariyosānataṃ dasseti . Evarūpenāti nayidaṃ ekavacanaṃ tattakavasena gahetabbaṃ, atha kho lakkhaṇe pavattanti dassento ‘‘tathārūpeneva bhikkhusatena bhikkhusahassena vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pallaṅkenāti pallaṅkapadesena, pallaṅkāsanantenāti attho. Iminā nayenāti vārantarasādhāraṇaṃ atthaṃ atidisati, asādhāraṇaṃ pana vakkhatevāti.
334 在此感到欢悦(āramati),所以称为「园」(ārāma)。显示巴利原文
334. Āramati etenāti ārāmo.
335 「决定修习」:即恒常地、固定地修习。「重阁偏殿」:即重阁的庭院。「不立于脐」:即不立在大地之脐的位置上。「辐间」:即轮辐之间的空隙,亦即各个轮辐的正中部位。显示巴利原文
335.Dhuvasevananti niyatasevitaṃ. Pāsādapariveṇeti pāsādaṅgaṇe. Nābhiyā patiṭṭhitānanti nābhiyā bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitānaṃ. Arantarānīti aravivarāni taṃtaṃarānaṃ vemajjhaṭṭhānāni.
336 受持阿兰若头陀支者,方称「阿兰若者」,并非仅因住在森林中即得此名。显示巴利原文
336.Samādinnaaraññadhutaṅgo āraññiko, na araññavāsamattena.
337 “他们不轻蔑”:即不使对方沮丧,不以轻蔑的心态互相提问,这是此处的意思。“熟练者”:指精通者。显示巴利原文
337.Naosādentīti na avasādenti, na avasādanāpekkhā aññamaññaṃ pañhaṃ pucchantīti attho. Pavattinīti paguṇā.
338 “出世间住等至”是指长老的阿拉汉果等至,从另一角度而言,也可理解为灭尽定。显示巴利原文
338.Lokuttarā vihārasamāpatti nāma therassa arahattaphalasamāpattiyo, pariyāyato pana nirodhasamāpattipi veditabbā.
339 “善哉”是给予阿难长老的。因此世尊说:“正如阿难能正确地解说那样”等。“正确地”意思是妥善地,即符合心意。凡是随顺心意而说出的,便称为正确的话。的确,因具足功德,能如此行、如实说的人,是值得称赞的。因此世尊说:“正是符合其身份的”等。多闻比丘在某部经中,对于戒等出现之处,善知这些教导,能依教奉行而圆满它们,故他说:“在戒出现的地方”等。意思是:让弟子们把握能出生道等功德的观之胚胎,将其培育成熟。显示巴利原文
339.Sādhukāro ānandattherassa dinno. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘yathā taṃ ānandova sammā byākaramāno byākareyyā’’tiādi. Sammāti suṭṭhu, yathāajjhāsayanti adhippāyo. Yena hi yaṃ yathācittaṃ kathitaṃ, taṃ sammā kathitaṃ nāma hoti. Sampattavasena hi yathākārī tathāvādī sobhati. Tenāha ‘‘attano anucchavikamevā’’tiādi. Bahussuto bhikkhu tattha tattha sutte sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhāne tesaṃ suviditattā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāno tāni paripūretīti āha ‘‘sīlassa āgataṭṭhāne’’tiādi. Maggādipasavanāya vipassanāgabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā paripākaṃ gametvāti attho.
340 「此即法则」是以类推的方式简略说明其义,而后展开阐述道:“尊者离婆多……”等语。显示巴利原文
340. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti atidesavasena saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘āyasmā hi revato’’tiādimāha.
342 「其余种种品类的烦恼」是指贪、嗔、痴等其余种种品类的烦恼。「抖落后」意思是彻底驱散之后。显示巴利原文
342.Aparepinānappakāre kileseti aparepi nānappakāre dosamohādikilese. Dhunitvāti vidhametvā.
343 「尊者大目犍连如此解说了」这是连接句。并不是把眼识路中所有的心都当作眼识,而是唯独将依止于眼的那个识作为眼识;接着,眼识之后紧接着的是领受心,再接着是推度心等等;心与心之间的这种差异是非常微细、柔和而且只有极短刹那的。另外,「蕴等种种」也就是所谓的蕴与蕴之间的差异等等。在地遍中入初禅,用同样的方式入第三禅等,按照所缘次第,跳过一禅而升进,称为「禅那跳跃」。在地遍中入初禅,然后将这个禅那转到火遍等,按照禅那次第,跳过一所缘而升进,称为「所缘跳跃」。从‘初禅有五支’等直至‘非想非非想处有二支’,纯粹只确定禅支,这是「支分别」。‘此是地遍……乃至此是白遍’等,纯粹只确定所缘,这是「所缘分别」。在地遍中入初禅后,就在同一个所缘还入其余禅那,这是「支转换」。在地遍中入初禅后,将此初禅转到水遍,乃至这样入一切遍处,这是「所缘转换」。「单方面增广」和「双方面增广」,这在蕴等教说中可以得到。因为在阿毗达摩法数分别中,世尊分别受蕴时,取三法放入二法,取二法放入三法,这是「单方面增广」。又以‘双方面增广’的方式在三法和二法中宣说,这是「双方面增广」。同样地,在其余诸蕴、界、处等,也应该按照《分别论》阿毗达摩法数分别中所说的方法来了解。因此他说:‘这只有阿毗达摩论师和说法师才能清楚了解。’对诸蕴等自性法、三特相、概念以及刹那之间不具善巧的人,就不能分辨:‘这是我的立场,那是别人的立场’。因此他对于自己的立场……乃至……对不同的法产生了误解。然而,阿毗达摩论师因为对诸蕴等具有善巧,所以对自己的立场……乃至……不会误解。显示巴利原文
343. Āyasmā mahāmoggallāno evaṃ byākāsīti sambandho. Sakalampi cakkhuviññāṇavīthigataṃ cittaṃ cakkhuviññāṇanti aggahetvā cakkhusannissitameva pana viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tadanantaraṃ sampaṭicchanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ santīraṇantiādinā saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ atiittarakhaṇavantaṃ cittantaraṃ cittanānattaṃ. Khandhādīnañca nānattasaṅkhātaṃ khandhantarādi. Pathavīkasiṇe paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā tatheva tatiyaṃ jhānantiādinā ārammaṇaṃ anukkamitvā jhānasseva ekantarikabhāvena ukkamanaṃ jhānokkantikaṃ nāma. Pathavīkasiṇe paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā puna tadeva tejokasiṇetiādinā jhānaṃ anukkamitvā ārammaṇasseva ekantarikabhāvena ukkamanaṃ ārammaṇokkantikaṃ nāma. ‘‘Paṭhamajjhānaṃ pañcaṅgika’’ntiādinā yāva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ duvaṅgikanti jhānaṅgamattasseva vavatthāpanaṃ aṅgavavatthānaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ pathavīkasiṇaṃ…pe… idaṃ odātakasiṇa’’nti ārammaṇamattasseva vavatthāpanaṃ ārammaṇavavatthānaṃ. Pathavīkasiṇe paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā tattheva itaresampi samāpajjanaṃ aṅgasaṅkanti. Pathavīkasiṇe paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā tadeva āpokasiṇeti evaṃ sabbakasiṇesu ekasseva jhānassa samāpajjanaṃ ārammaṇasaṅkanti. Ekatovaḍḍhanaṃ ubhatovaḍḍhananti idaṃ khandhādidesanāyaṃ labbhati. Abhidhammabhājanīye hi vedanākkhandhaṃ bhājento bhagavā tike gahetvā dukesu pakkhipi, duke gahetvā tikesu pakkhipi, idaṃ ekatovaḍḍhanaṃ. Tike ca duke ca ubhatovaḍḍhananīhārena kathesi, idaṃ ubhatovaḍḍhanaṃ. Evaṃ sesakhandhesu dhātāyatanādīsu ca yathārahaṃ vibhaṅgappakaraṇe (vibha. 32-33; 155-156, 183-184) abhidhammabhājanīye āgatanayena veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ābhidhammikadhammakathikasseva pākaṭa’’nti. Khandhādīsu sabhāvadhammesu tīsu lakkhaṇesu paññattiyaṃ samayantaresu ca kosallābhāvato ayaṃ sakavādo ayaṃ paravādoti na jānāti. Tato eva sakavādaṃ…pe… dhammantaraṃ visaṃvādeti. Khandhādīsu pana kusalatāya ābhidhammiko sakavādaṃ…pe… na visaṃvādeti.
344 「能够使心安住于自己的掌控之中」,这是因为他有审虑与修习的力量,足以统摄心的运作。现在,为了从反面和正面来阐明这个道理,便说「是劣慧者」等语。其中,「他的一切」是指属于他的一切。「邪行妄动」即是以烦恼为根源的扭曲行为和种种恶行的动荡。「打碎后」就是加以粉碎之后。「之外」指的是业处之外,在各种所缘上。显示巴利原文
344.Cittaṃattano vase vattetuṃ sakkoti paṭisaṅkhānabhāvanābalehi pariggaṇhanasamatthattā. Idāni tamatthaṃ byatirekato anvayato ca vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘duppañño hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha sabbānassāti sabbāni assa. Visevitavipphanditānīti kilesavisūkāyikāni ceva duccaritavipphanditāni ca. Bhañjitvāti madditvā. Bahīti kammaṭṭhānato bahi puthuttārammaṇe.
345 「以方便」中的「方便」一词,正如「婆罗门,确有一方便」等句中的用法,是原因的意思。所以他说:「是有极妙的原因的」。倘若世尊所开示的「在此,舍利弗,比丘在午后从团食返回……」这段话,是就自己的大菩提狮子座而说,那么便会推出这样的结论:寺院只应由正自觉者所庄严,而不应由其他任何人庄严。因此,世尊接着说:「况且为了未来的人们……」等等。以通往涅槃的修行为其精髓,故称为「行道精髓」。「以无方便」就是不用任何方便、借口,全然直截了当。比丘立下「不证得阿拉汉果决不起座」的坚定誓愿而坐下,直至证得阿拉汉果方才起身。正是由这样的人,这片牛角沙罗树林得以庄严。意思是说,在教法中,一切精进皆以阿拉汉果为终极目标。发起能趣向漏尽的修行,并以漏尽来结束开示,因此,说法是随着法谈的理趣而圆满收束的。显示巴利原文
345.Pariyāyenāti ettha pariyāya-saddo ‘‘atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 3-9) viya kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘sobhanakāraṇaṃ atthī’’ti. Yadi bhagavā – ‘‘idha, sāriputta, bhikkhu pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto’’tiādinā attano mahābodhipallaṅkaṃ sandhāyāha, evaṃ sante sammāsambuddheheva saṅghārāmo sobhetabbo, na aññehīti āpannanti āha ‘‘apica pacchimaṃ janata’’ntiādi. Nibbānatthāya paṭipattisāraṃ etassāti paṭipattisāro, taṃ paṭipattisāraṃ. Nippariyāyenevāti kenaci pariyāyena lesena vinā mukhyena nayeneva. Yo ‘‘arahattaṃ appatvā na vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti daḷhasamādānaṃ katvā nisinno taṃ adhigantvāva uṭṭhahati. Evarūpena idaṃ gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sobhati, sāsane sabbārambhānaṃ tadatthattāti attho. Āsavakkhayāvahaṃ paṭipattiṃ ārabhitvā āsavakkhayeneva desanāya pariyosāpitattā yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
三、大牧牛人经注疏(Mahāgopālakasuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
3. Mahāgopālakasuttavaṇṇanā
346 「其中」(tatthāti):指在《牧牛人经》中。「三种话」(tisso kathāti):指三部注释书(tisso aṭṭhakathā),意思是这部经的义理解释有三种方式。「单管释」(ekanāḷikā):因为以每一句的“管”(nāḷa,即导出义理的途径)为根本,所以称为单管释;或者说,每一句的“管”都是让义理显现的道路,因此称为单管释。所以他解释说:“逐一说明每一句的含义”(ekekapadassa atthakathana)。「四方释」(caturassā):具有四个部分或方面作为观察义理的方法,所以称为四方释。因此他解释说:“结成一组四句来解说”(catukkaṃ bandhitvā kathana)。「坐定而说式」(nisinnavattikā):确定地安坐下来,所开始的法义,其规则与圆满都包含在其中,所以称为坐定而说式;意思是对已经开头的义理,能一项一项地各自令它达到究竟。因此他说:“在显示了智者牧牛人(gopālaka)之后……”等语。「逐每一句」(ekekapadassāti):意思是不采用综合归纳的方式把许多句子的意思合在一起解释,而是对每一句单独进行义理解说。这种方式在一切经典中都能见到。「结成一组四句」(catukkaṃ bandhitvā):这是指在黑分中,将譬喻与所喻之事作为一双来结合,在白分中也是如此。这种四句结合的方式只有在像这类经文中才出现。「令其达到终点」(pariyosānagamananti):有些论师这样说——先在黑分中展示譬喻,因为“譬喻只是为了让人通达所喻之事”,所以引出所喻的意义;而叙述染污分(saṃkilesapakkha)正是为了显明清净分(vodānapakkha),因此也以譬喻和所喻分别的方式引出白分,从而使整部经的义理达到终点。在显示黑分中的所喻之后,再让它趋于终点,道理也是一样。然而,其他论师则认为:“在黑分和白分中,分别把各个譬喻与所喻的意义逐一解说清楚,直到各自圆满,这就叫做‘令其达到终点’。”「这」(ayanti):指的就是坐定而说式。「在此处」(idhāti):就在这部《牧牛人经》中。「为一切先师所通行」(sabbācariyānaṃ āciṇṇāti):意思是这种解释方式被所有过去的导师们所采用和赞叹,而且圣典(pāḷi)也是照这样流传下来的。显示巴利原文
346.Tatthāti gopālakasutte. Tisso kathāti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.11.17) tisso aṭṭhakathā, tividhā suttassa atthavaṇṇanāti attho. Ekekaṃ padaṃ nāḷaṃ mūlaṃ etissāti evaṃsaññitā ekanāḷikā, ekekaṃ vā padaṃ nāḷaṃ atthaniggamanamaggo etissāti ekanāḷikā. Tenāha ‘‘ekekapadassa atthakathana’’nti. Cattāro aṃsā bhāgā atthasallakkhaṇūpāyā etissāti caturassā. Tenāha ‘‘catukkaṃ bandhitvā kathana’’nti. Niyamato nisinnassa āraddhassa vatto saṃvatto etissā atthīti nisinnavattikā, yathāraddhassa atthassa visuṃ visuṃ pariyosāpikāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘paṇḍitaṃ gopālakaṃ dassetvā’’tiādi. Ekekapadassāti piṇḍatthadassanavasena bahunnaṃ padānaṃ ekajjhaṃ atthaṃ akathetvā ekamekassa padassa atthavaṇṇanā. Ayaṃ sabbattheva labbhati. Catukkaṃ bandhitvāti kaṇhapakkhe upamūpameyyadvayaṃ, tathā sukkapakkheti idaṃ catukkaṃ yojetvā. Ayaṃ īdisesu eva suttesu labbhati. Pariyosānagamananti keci tāva āhu – ‘‘kaṇhapakkhe upamaṃ dassetvā upamā ca nāma yāvadeva upameyyasampaṭidānatthāti upameyyatthaṃ āharitvā saṃkilesapakkhaniddeso ca vodānapakkhavibhāvanatthāyāti sukkapakkhampi upamūpameyyavibhāgena āharitvā suttatthassa pariyosāpana’’nti. Kaṇhapakkhe upameyyaṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanādīsupi eseva nayo. Apare pana ‘‘kaṇhapakkhe sukkapakkhe ca taṃtaṃupamūpameyyatthānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ pariyosāpetvāva kathanaṃ pariyosānagamana’’nti vadanti. Ayanti nisinnavattikā. Idhāti imasmiṃ gopālakasutte. Sabbācariyānaṃ āciṇṇāti sabbehipi pubbācariyehi ācaritā saṃvaṇṇitā, tathā ceva pāḷi pavattāti.
“支”(aṅgāni):因以组成部分的样态而被认知,故称为支,即部分或方面。然此处所说者,因其皆具过失之性,故言:“‘以支’(aṅgehi)即‘以不善的部分’(aguṇakoṭṭhāsehi)”。“牛群”(gomaṇḍalaṃ):指牛的聚集。“守护”(pariharituṃ):即保护。而此守护乃护持牛群而游走,故经文释为“护持后而行”(pariggahetvā vicarituṃ)。“增长”(vaḍḍhiṃ):指牛的数量增多,亦即拥有丰足牛乳等所计之增长。“色”(rūpaṃ):以“有如此之多”而被认知,故称为色,此处既含数量之限定,亦指身体之形貌,因而说“从计算上或从颜色上”(gaṇanato vā vaṇṇato vā)。他根本不知牛已失坏,故亦不追寻。而于“青色”(nīlā)一词中,iti 表示“等等”,由此含摄白色、杂色等余色。显示巴利原文
Aṅgīyanti avayavabhāvena ñāyantīti aṅgāni, bhāgā. Tāni panettha yasmā sāvajjasabhāvāni, tasmā āha ‘‘aṅgehīti aguṇakoṭṭhāsehī’’ti. Gomaṇḍalanti gosamūhaṃ. Pariharitunti rakkhituṃ. Taṃ pana pariharaṇaṃ pariggahetvā vicaraṇanti āha ‘‘pariggahetvā vicaritu’’nti. Vaḍḍhinti gunnaṃ bahubhāvaṃ bahugorasatāsaṅkhātaṃ parivuddhiṃ. ‘‘Ettakamida’’nti rūpīyatīti rūpaṃ, parimānaparicchedopi sarīrarūpampīti āha ‘‘gaṇanato vā vaṇṇato vā’’ti. Na pariyesati vinaṭṭhabhāvasseva ajānanato. Nīlāti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Tena setasabalādivaṇṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“弓、矛、标枪等”(dhanusattisūlādīti):此处,弓的标志,是射箭师们刻在牛身上的印记;矛的标志,是库玛拉巴蒂伽族刻在牛身上的印记;标枪的标志,是伊萨拉巴蒂伽族刻在牛身上的印记——其搭配如此。以“等”字,则含摄罗摩瓦苏德瓦族等刻在牛身上的斧、轮等诸种标志。显示巴利原文
Dhanusattisūlādīti ettha issāsācariyānaṃ gāvīsu kataṃ dhanulakkhaṇaṃ. Kumārabhattigaṇānaṃ gāvīsu kataṃ sattilakkhaṇaṃ. Issarabhattigaṇānaṃ gāvīsu kataṃ sūlalakkhaṇanti yojanā. Ādi-saddena rāmavāsudevagaṇādīnaṃ gāvīsu kataṃ pharasucakkādilakkhaṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“青蝇”(nīlamakkhikā):指黄褐色之蝇,或即是小苍蝇。“蛆”(sāṭikā):因其能令腐烂、损坏,故称为蛆;长大的蛆则称“大蛆”(āsāṭikā)。故下文云“增长的”(vaḍḍhantī)等。显示巴利原文
Nīlamakkhikāti piṅgalamakkhikā, khuddamakkhikā eva vā. Saṭati rujati etāyāti sāṭikā, saṃvaddhā sāṭikāti āsāṭikā. Tenāha ‘‘vaḍḍhantī’’tiādi.
“树皮衣”(vākena):指用树皮制成的布。“破布衣”(cīrakena):指用碎布拼成的衣。“在雨季内”(antovasse):指在雨季期间。“无鳄鱼”(niggāhaṃ):指没有鳄鱼等能抓走牛的水中生物。“被饮”(pītaṃ):指饮用水已被喝完的状态。因有狮子、老虎等险难,所以那里是令人恐怖、畏惧的。显示巴利原文
Vākenāti vākapattena. Cīrakenāti pilotikena. Antovasseti vassakālassa abbhantare. Niggāhanti susumārādiggāharahitaṃ. Pītanti pānīyassa pītabhāvaṃ. Sīhabyagghādiparissayena sāsaṅko sappaṭibhayo.
“五日的”(pañcāhito):因为已经过了五日,所以称为五日的;该周期即“每五日一轮”(pañcāhikavāro)。同样地,应知“每七日一轮”(sattāhikavāro)也是如此。“惯行处”(ciṇṇaṭṭhānaṃ):指经常行走的地方,也就是已受持为行境的地方。显示巴利原文
Pañca ahāni bhūtāni etassāti pañcāhito, so eva vāroti pañcāhikavāro. Evaṃ sattāhikavāroti veditabbo. Ciṇṇaṭṭhānanti caritaṭṭhānaṃ gocaraggahitaṭṭhānaṃ.
“父所应作处”(pituṭṭhānaṃ):指父亲应做的事,即父亲所应完成的职责。“随其所好而取,然后去”(yathāruciṃ gahetvā gacchanti):随顺牛的喜好,取定行境之地或河对岸,然后前往。“牛食”(gobhattaṃ):指混合了棉籽等、专给牛吃的食物;因为提到了食物,粥也被包含在内。显示巴利原文
Pituṭṭhānanti pitarā kātabbaṭṭhānaṃ, pitarā kātabbakaraṇanti attho. Yathāruciṃ gahetvā gacchantīti gunnaṃ rucianurūpaṃ gocarabhūmiyaṃ vā nadipāraṃ vā gahetvā gacchanti. Gobhattanti kappāsaṭṭhikādimissaṃ gobhuñjitabbaṃ bhattaṃ, bhattaggahaṇeneva yāgupi gahitā.
347 为了说明所说的“以二种行相”是哪两种,所以才说“从计算上或从起源上”。如此,在经典中出现的那些色法,是在把“生”拆分为“积集”与“相续”两种、并且不纳入心所依处之后,于《色蕴品》的经典(《法集论》651-655)中说为“十处、十五种微细色”等。那二十五个“色部分”:因为它们各自具有独特的自相,而且彼此互不混杂,所以称为色部分。或者,“色部分”是指:它们并非个别单独生起,而是以色聚的方式整体生起,因此也就是色聚。而所说的“部分”即分支、部门,也就是肢体的意思。或者,身体就是躯体,属于它的分支,如头发等,便叫作“部分”;身体其他肢体也如同躯体的分支,故称为部分。“譬如”:这是譬喻的连结。在此,“掌握了色”是指:如同前面所说明的色法,以智慧从其自相上掌握之后。“确立了无色”是指:依靠那些色法,并以它们为所缘而生起的受等四蕴,将其确立为“无色”。“掌握了色与无色”是指:接着在那当中,凡是具有被破坏这一特相的便是色,与它不同的便是无色,除了这两者之外,绝不存在任显示巴利原文
347.‘‘Dvīhākārehī’’ti vuttaṃ ākāradvayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘gaṇanato vā samuṭṭhānato vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatāti ‘‘upacayo santatī’’ti jātiṃ dvidhā bhinditvā hadayavatthuṃ aggahetvā ‘‘dasa āyatanāni pañcadasa sukhumarūpānī’’ti evaṃ rūpakaṇḍapāḷiyaṃ (dha. sa. 651-655) āgatā. Pañcavīsati rūpakoṭṭhāsāti salakkhaṇato aññamaññasaṅkarābhāvato rūpabhāgā. Rūpakoṭṭhāsāti vā visuṃ visuṃ appavattitvā kalāpabhāveneva pavattanato rūpakalāpā. Koṭṭhāsāti ca aṃsā, avayavāti attho. Koṭṭhanti vā sarīraṃ, tassa aṃsā kesādayo koṭṭhāsāti aññepi avayavā koṭṭhāsā viya koṭṭhāsā. Seyyathāpīti upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Tattha rūpaṃ pariggahetvāti yathāvuttaṃ rūpaṃ salakkhaṇato ñāṇena pariggaṇhitvā. Arūpaṃ vavatthapetvāti taṃ rūpaṃ nissāya ārammaṇañca katvā pavattamāne vedanādike cattāro khandhe ‘‘arūpa’’nti vavatthapetvā. Rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvāti puna tattha yaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ rūpaṃ, tadaññaṃ arūpaṃ, ubhayavinimuttaṃ kiñci natthi attā vā attaniyaṃ vāti evaṃ rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvā. Tadubhayañca avijjādinā paccayena sappaccayanti paccayaṃ sallakkhetvā aniccādilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā yo kalāpasammasanādikkamena kammaṭṭhānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti, so na vaḍḍhatīti yojanā.
“这些色法为单一起源”是指:眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、女根、男根、命根这八种,以业为起源;身表和语表这两种,以心为起源——以上这些色法属于单一起源。声处这一种,以时节和心为双重起源。色的轻快性、柔软性、适业性——这些色法以时节、心、食为三重起源。色处、香处、味处、触处、空界、水界、段食——这些色法以时节、心、食、业为四重起源。至于积集、相续、老性、色的无常性——对于这些色法,他根本不知道它们从何处生起。应当了知:在“不知从起源上色的”等情形中,可参照“不知从计算上色的”等处所说明的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Ettakaṃrūpaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānanti cakkhāyatanaṃ, sotaghānajivhākāyāyatanaṃ itthindriyaṃ purisindriyaṃ jīvitindriyanti aṭṭhavidhaṃ kammavasena, kāyaviññatti vacīviññattīti idaṃ dvayaṃ cittavasenāti ettakaṃ rūpaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Saddāyatanamekaṃ utucittavasena dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ. Rūpassa lahutā mudutā kammaññatāti ettakaṃ rūpaṃ utucittāhāravasena tisamuṭṭhānaṃ. Rūpagandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ ākāsadhātu āpodhātu kabaḷīkāro āhāroti ettakaṃ rūpaṃ utucittāhārakammavasena catusamuṭṭhānaṃ. Upacayo santati jaratā rūpassa aniccatāti ettakaṃ rūpaṃ na kutoci samuṭṭhātīti na jānāti. Samuṭṭhānato rūpaṃ ajānantotiādīsu vattabbaṃ ‘‘gaṇanato rūpaṃ ajānanto’’tiādesu vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
“业相”:自己所造恶行业的特征就是他的标志,故称“业相”,这是指愚者。确实有这样说:“比丘们,愚者有三种愚者的特征。哪三种?即思惟恶思、言说恶说、造作恶行。比丘们,这些就是……特征。”(《增支部》3.2;《导论》116)自己所造善行业的特征就是他的标志,故也称作“业相”,这是指智者。这也有说:“比丘们,智者有三种智者的特征。哪三种?即思惟善思、言说善说、造作善行。比丘们,这些就是……智者的特征。”(《中部》3.253;《增支部》3.3;《导论》116)因此说:“善与不善的业是智者和愚者的特征。”“避开愚者而不亲近智者”是指:一个真正希求利益的人,应当避开愚人而亲近智者,他却不肯这样做。为了显示这样做的人会有何种过患,所以又说了“避开愚者”等文。在此,凡是世尊许可说“这对你们是适宜的”,且与之相符合的,就称为“适合的”;凡是世尊禁止说“这对你们是不适宜的”,且与之相符合的,就称为“不适合的”。凡是与善巧相应的,即是“善”;与它相对立的,则是“不善”。善也就是“无过失的”,不善则显示巴利原文
Kammalakkhaṇoti attanā kataṃ duccaritakammaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti kammalakkhaṇo, bālo. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, bālassa bālalakkhaṇāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Duccintitacintī hoti, dubbhāsitabhāsī, dukkaṭakammakārī. Imāni kho…pe… lakkhaṇānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.2; netti. 116). Attanā kataṃ sucaritakammaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti kammalakkhaṇo, paṇḍito. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, paṇḍitassa paṇḍitalakkhaṇāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Sucintitacintī hoti, subhāsitabhāsī, sukatakammakārī. Imāni kho…pe… paṇḍitalakkhaṇānī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.253; a. ni. 3.3; netti. 116). Tenāha ‘‘kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ paṇḍitamālalakkhaṇa’’nti. Bāle vajjetvā paṇḍite na sevatīti yaṃ bālapuggale vajjetvā paṇḍitasevanaṃ atthakāmena kātabbaṃ, taṃ na karoti. Tathābhūtassa ayamādīnavoti dassetuṃ puna ‘‘bāle vajjetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘idaṃ vo kappatī’’ti anuññātaṃ, tadanulomañce, taṃ kappiyaṃ. Yaṃ ‘‘idaṃ vo na kappatī’’ti paṭikkhittaṃ, tadanulomañce, taṃ akappiyaṃ. Yaṃ kosallasambhūtaṃ, taṃ kusalaṃ, tappaṭipakkhaṃ akusalaṃ. Tadeva sāvajjaṃ, kusalaṃ anavajjaṃ. Āpattito ādito dve āpattikkhandhā garukaṃ, tadaññaṃ lahukaṃ. Dhammato mahāsāvajjaṃ garukaṃ, appasāvajjaṃ lahukaṃ. Sappaṭikāraṃ satekiccaṃ, appaṭikāraṃ atekicchaṃ. Dhammatānugataṃ kāraṇaṃ, itaraṃ akāraṇaṃ. Taṃ ajānantoti kappiyākappiyaṃ garukalahukaṃ satekicchātekicchaṃ ajānanto suvisuddhaṃ katvā sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ na sakkoti, kusalākusalaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ ajānanto khandhādīsu akusalatāya rūpārūpapariggahampi kātuṃ na sakkoti, kuto tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhanā. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti.
生于如牛般的自体之中,因而成为苦的生起之因;这些邪思维犹如大蛆,故称为「大蛆」。因此经文说:「将不善思维视作大蛆而除去之。」显示巴利原文
Govaṇasadise attabhāve uppajjitvā tattha dukkhuppattihetuto micchāvitakkā āsāṭikā viyāti āsāṭikāti āha ‘‘akusalavitakkaṃ āsāṭikaṃ ahāretvā’’ti.
「比丘们,所谓『痈疽』,正是五取蕴的别称。」(《增支部》8.56)依此而言:犹如具有六个疮口、不断流脓的痈疽,需用碎布片覆盖;同样,由此六门流出烦恼不净的有身之疮,应以正念防护而遮盖。但此牧牛人完全不这样做,因此说:「如同那牧牛人不覆盖疮口,不成就防护。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Gaṇḍoti kho, bhikkhave, pañcannetaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ adhivacana’’nti vacanato (a. ni. 8.56) chahi vaṇamukhehi vissandamānayūso gaṇḍo viya pilotikakhaṇḍena chahi dvārehi vissandamānakilesāsuci attabhāvavaṇo satisaṃvarena pidahitabbo, ayaṃ pana evaṃ na karotīti āha ‘‘yathā so gopālako vaṇaṃ na paṭicchādeti, evaṃ saṃvaraṃ na sampādetī’’ti.
犹如烟依薪柴而生,当其微细时,渗入各各缝隙弥漫,能消除众生蚊虻等逼恼,且为火焰生起之前导;同样,依色法与无色法之聚集作为薪柴而生起的说法之智,当其微细时,渗入各各蕴与处之内部而弥漫,能消除众生邪思维等逼恼,且为智火生起之前导。因其如烟,故称为‘烟’。所以说:「牧牛人不造说法之烟,即不造烟。」为前来坐于身边之人说相应法谈,称为「近坐谈」;对已施等功德作随喜之谈,称为「随喜谈」。此皆因他不作说法等事。「而不知他是多闻、有德之人」,为何这样说?难道说法等不应是为了令人了知吗?诚然,本非应作,但此处是就如以净心说法时,他人得以了知说法者的功德而言。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
Yathā dhūmo indhanaṃ nissāya uppajjamāno saṇho sukhumo taṃ taṃ vivaraṃ anupavissa byāpento sattānaṃ ḍaṃsamakasādiparissayaṃ vinodeti, aggijālasamuṭṭhānassa pubbaṅgamo hoti, evaṃ dhammadesanāñāṇassa indhanabhūtaṃ rūpārūpadhammajātaṃ nissāya uppajjamānā saṇhā sukhumā taṃ taṃ khandhantaraṃ āyatanantarañca anupavissa byāpeti, sattānaṃ micchāvitakkādiparissayaṃ vinodeti, ñāṇaggijālasamuṭṭhānassa pubbaṅgamoti dhūmo viyāti dhūmoti āha ‘‘gopālako dhūmaṃ viya dhammadesanādhūmaṃ na karotī’’ti. Attano santikaṃ upagantvā nisinnassa kātabbā tadanucchavikā dhammakathā upanisinnakathā. Katassa dānādipuññassa anumodanakathā anumodanā. Tatoti dhammakathādīnaṃ akaraṇato. ‘‘Bahussuto guṇavā’’ti na jānantīti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu attano jānāpanatthaṃ dhammakathādi na kātabbamevāti? Saccaṃ, na kātabbameva, suddhāsayena pana dhamme kathite tassa guṇajānanataṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā –
对于沉默不言者,众人不知他是混迹愚者中的智者;
他应当言说法,应当令法光耀,高举诸仙人的旗帜。”(《相应部》2.241)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nābhāsamānaṃ jānanti, missaṃ bālehi paṇḍitaṃ; Bhāsaye jotaye dhammaṃ, paggaṇhe isinaṃ dhaja’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 2.241);
“渡处”,是指众人在此处渡过之处,也就是为沐浴等目的而进入河流、池塘的地方。然而,正如那水能为进入水中的众生冲去身体污垢、消除疲劳、令得清净,同样地,多闻者也能以法水为前来亲近的众生冲去内心尘垢、消除疲劳、令得清净。因此,他们如同渡处,故被称为“渡处”。是故经文说:“作为渡处的多闻比丘”。“此句应如何安立其言说?”——尊者,此音节、此音声,应如何安立于此义之中?以何种方式而成为表达此义的能诠?或者应读作“应安立”,意即:此自性词,如何于此通行?这是在问此句的字面之义。问“此处,此巴利文说什么?”是在问句义。问“义显示什么?”则是在问句义或暗示义。他不遍问,是指完全不以断除疑惑的方式提出问题。他不遍问,是指他不反复表明自己求知的心意,不加以阐明,是故说“不令他知”。“开示”,是指将义理分析之后而解说,因此他们是“不分析而展示”。“未令明显”,是指未被智慧所照了的、隐藏的、覆盖的义理。“不令明显”,即如不将须弥山脚下的毛发拔出,或如不把地脉之水拨开令其显现一般,不予揭示。显示巴利原文
Taranti etthāti titthaṃ, nadītaḷākādīnaṃ nahānādiatthaṃ otaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathā pana taṃ udakena otiṇṇasattānaṃ sarīramalaṃ pavāheti, parissamaṃ vinodeti, visuddhiṃ uppādeti, evaṃ bahussutā attano samīpaṃ otiṇṇasattānaṃ dhammūdakena cittamalaṃ pavāhenti, parissamaṃ vinodenti, visuddhiṃ uppādenti, tasmā te titthaṃ viyāti titthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘titthabhūte bahussutabhikkhū’’ti. Byañjanaṃ kathaṃ ropetabbanti, bhante, idaṃ byañjanaṃ ayaṃ saddo kathaṃ imasmiṃ atthe ropetabbo, kena pakārena imassa atthassa vācako jāto. ‘‘Nirūpetabba’’nti vā pāṭho, nirūpetabbaṃ ayaṃ sabhāvanirutti kathamettha niruḷhāti adhippāyo. Imassa bhāsitassa ko atthoti saddatthaṃ pucchati. Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti imasmiṃ pāḷipadese. Pāḷi kiṃ vadetīti bhāvatthaṃ pucchati. Attho kiṃ dīpetīti bhāvatthaṃ vā saṅketatthaṃ vā. Na paripucchatīti vimaticchedanapucchāvasena sabbaso pucchaṃ na karoti. Na paripañhatīti pari pari attano ñātuṃ icchaṃ na ācikkhati na vibhāveti. Tenāha ‘‘na jānāpetī’’ti. Teti bahussutabhikkhū. Vivaraṇaṃ nāma atthassa vibhajitvā kathananti āha ‘‘bhājetvā na dassentī’’ti. Anuttānīkatanti ñāṇena apākaṭīkataṃ guyhaṃ paṭicchannaṃ. Na uttānīkarontīti sinerumūlakaṃ vālikaṃ uddharanto viya pathavīsandhārodakaṃ vivaritvā dassento viya ca uttānaṃ na karonti. Evaṃ yassa dhammassa vasena bahussutā ‘‘tittha’’nti vuttā pariyāyato, idāni tameva dhammaṃ nippariyāyato titthanti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dhammo hi taranti etena nibbānaṃ nāma taḷākanti ‘‘tittha’’nti vuccati. Tenāha bhagavā sumedhabhūto –
如是,能洗除烦恼垢染的法,即在于不死湖中;
他不去寻求那湖,过失并不在不死湖。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Evaṃ kilesamaladhovaṃ, vijjante amatantaḷe; Na gavesati taṃ taḷākaṃ, na doso amatantaḷe’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.14);
正因为法本身就是趣入涅槃的渡处,而他不晓了趣入的方法,所以被说为‘不知法渡处’。显示巴利原文
Dhammasseva nibbānassotaraṇatitthabhūtassa otaraṇapakāraṃ ajānanto ‘‘dhammatitthaṃ na jānātī’’ti vutto.
“已饮未饮”:在牛群中,他既不知道哪些牛已饮水、哪些未饮,也无法分辨。因为不能分辨,所以说“得不到”。在说明“得不到利益”之后,为了显示他得不到的情形,便接着说“前往听法堂”等等。显示巴利原文
Pītāpītanti gogaṇe pītaṃ apītañca gorūpaṃ na jānāti na vindati. Avindanto hi na labhatīti vutto. ‘‘Ānisaṃsaṃ na vindatī’’ti vatvā tassa avindanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘dhammassavanaggaṃ gantvā’’tiādimāha.
“此‘出世间’”一词,是针对‘圣’而说的。‘圣’可理解为由近缘而遮止无间相违,或将‘圣’视为无过失的同义词。‘八支’则应既可从一一支别别把握,也可合为八支来把握;依通常而言,说为八支性。如此一来,七支圣道也得以含摄其中。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ lokuttaroti padaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ariya’’nti. Paccāsattiñāyena anantaravidhippaṭisedho vā, ariya-saddo vā niddosapariyāyo daṭṭhabbo. Aṭṭhaṅgikanti ca visuṃ ekajjhañca aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ upādāya gahetabbaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgatā bāhullato ca. Evañca katvā sattaṅgassapi ariyamaggassa saṅgaho siddho hoti.
在‘四念处’等教导中,没有加以区别地只说到念处。其中,以身、受、心、法为所缘的念处是世间的;而在这些念处中,通过破除迷乱而生起、以涅槃为所缘的念处是出世间的。像这样,他不能如实地了知:这些是世间的,这些是出世间的。显示巴利原文
Cattāro satipaṭṭhānetiādīsu avisesena satipaṭṭhānā vuttā. Tattha kāyavedanācittadhammārammaṇā satipaṭṭhānā lokiyā, tattha sammohaviddhaṃsanavasena pavattā nibbānārammaṇā lokuttarāti evaṃ ime lokiyā, ime lokuttarāti yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti.
“无余地挤取”是指在接受时不知限量,对某些施主因信心减退,或对某些资具的损耗,都毫无保留地加以挤榨。于言语上过度致力,称为“语之致力”;于资具上过度致力,称为“资具之致力”。显示巴利原文
Anavasesaṃ duhatīti paṭiggahaṇe mattaṃ ajānanto kismiñci dāyake saddhāhāniyā kismiñci paccayahāniyā anavasesaṃ duhati. Vācāya abhihāro vācābhihāro. Paccayānaṃ abhihāro paccayābhihāro.
“这些人对我们不怀尊重心”:以此指出新比丘们没有法随行,因为他们对阿阇梨与亲教师未能生起如同对父亲般的敬爱。进而,通过指出他们无学处恭敬等,表明他们不具足接受摄受的资格;由此,上座们对他们也不予摄受。实际上,那些依止戒等功德、在教法中已达稳固的同梵行者,既不会去摄受不应摄受之人,也不会做无意义的摄受。因此才说“新比丘”。“法说结集”:指依传承而来的杂法说理方式,与四谛、有情、结生、缘起等相关联,用以显示空性等的密典。“以所说颠倒为依据”:指如同在“非色知者”等表述中所说的遮遣,以遮止、不执取的方式来领会。“连结后应知”:如“色知者是从数量或颜色而知晓色”等例,又如“他的牛群不会衰退,也不会脱离五种牛乳的受用”等句,将这些义理连结之后,在各地相应之处应酌情理解其义。显示巴利原文
Ime amhesu garucittīkāraṃ na karontīti iminā navakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammasampaṭipattiyā abhāvaṃ dasseti ācariyupajjhāyesu pitupemassa anupaṭṭhāpanato. Tena ca sikkhāgāravatābhāvadīpanena saṅgahassa abhājanabhāvaṃ, tena therānaṃ tesu anuggahābhāvaṃ. Na hi sīlādiguṇehi sāsane thirabhāvappattā ananuggahetabbe sabrahmacārī anuggaṇhanti, niratthakaṃ vā anuggahaṃ karonti. Tenāha ‘‘navake bhikkhū’’ti. Dhammakathābandhanti paveṇiāgataṃ pakiṇṇakadhammakathāmaggaṃ. Saccasattapaṭisandhipaccayākārapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ suññatādīpanaṃ guyhaganthaṃ. Vuttavipallāsavasenāti ‘‘na rūpaññū’’tiādīsu vuttassa paṭisedhassa paṭikkhepavasena aggahaṇavasena. Yojetvāti ‘‘rūpaññū hotīti gaṇanāto vā vaṇṇato vā rūpaṃ jānātī’’tiādinā, ‘‘tassa gogaṇopi na parihāyati, pañcagorasaparibhogatopi na paribāhiro hotī’’tiādinā ca atthaṃ yojetvā. Veditabboti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ padese yathārahaṃ attho veditabbo.
4. 小牧牛人经注显示巴利原文
4. Cūḷagopālakasuttavaṇṇanā
350 “以布为炬”:指以布制作的火炬。“布炬城”:意为该处布成为火炬,指那座城市。对于肉眼而言,整条恒河清楚地显现,变得明显而呈现;对于天眼或一切眼而言,即使世尊坐在任何一处,恒河也都能清楚地显现。“安稳”意为无灾祸。“增长”意为不退失。“无病”意为健康、无疾病之苦。显示巴利原文
350.Celukkāhīti celamayāhi ukkāhi. Ukkabhūtāni celāni etthāti ukkacelā, nagaraṃ. Sabbā gaṅgā pākaṭā hutvā paññāyatīti pakaticakkhussa pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhāti, dibbacakkhussa pana samantacakkhussa vā yattha katthaci nisinnassapi bhagavato pākaṭā hutvā paññāyateva. Sotthīti anupaddavo. Vaḍḍhīti aparihāni. Ārogyanti arogatā ābādhābhāvo.
「摩揭陀人」:摩揭陀国是其住处,故称摩揭陀人,即摩揭陀国人。于“慧”并无坏的体性,以其纯一无过故,此处“du-”一字如“恶戒”等词中,表“无有”之义;而“jāti-”一字表自性,故说为「无慧自性者」。“-”字表开始之义,故说「patāresī」意为开始渡,因牛群尚未到达彼岸。「善毗提诃人」:即美好的毗提诃人。据说毗提诃国因其地域景观之成就与森林之优美等,故称为美好。「作成漩涡状」:即落入漩涡、作环形旋转。「不增长,到达毁灭」:此言因连少数牛亦被河流冲走,一头不剩,故如是说。即使有少许牛存留,牛群亦可能渐渐增长。「休息处」:即消除疲劳之处。「从渡口脱落」:由于无法抓持,未能到达渡口。「称为无病也没有」:意谓连一根毛都不剩,所有牛俱灭没于河流之中。显示巴利原文
Magadho janapado nivāso etassāti māgadho, māgadhova māgadhiko. Paññāya nāma duṭṭhubhāvo natthi ekantānavajjatāya, tasmā du-saddo abhāvavācī ‘‘dussīlo’’tiādīsu viya, jāti-saddo ca sabhāvatthoti āha ‘‘nippaññasabhāvo’’ti. -Saddo ārambhatthoti āha ‘‘patāresīti tāretuṃ ārabhī’’ti paratīraṃ gāvīnaṃ appattattā. Suvidehānanti sundaravidehānaṃ. Videharaṭṭhaṃ kira bhūmibhāgadassanasampattiyā ca vanarāmaṇeyyakādinā ca sundaraṃ. Āmaṇḍalikaṃ karitvāti āvatte patitā temaṇḍalākārena paribbhamitvā. Katipayāpi gāviyo asesetvā nadīsotena vūḷhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘avaḍḍhiṃ vināsaṃ pāpuṇiṃsū’’ti. Katipayāsupi hi avasiṭṭhāsu gāvīsu anukkamenapi siyā gogaṇassa vaḍḍhīti. Vissamaṭṭhānanti parissamavinodanaṭṭhānaṃ. Titthā bhaṭṭhāti gahetuṃ asamatthatāya titthaṃ appattā. Arogo nāma nāhosīti lomamattampi asesetvā sabbā gāviyo nadīsote vinaṭṭhāti attho.
于此处随顺世间施设而说的蕴、处、界,不知这些的人即被称为「对此世间不善巧」,故说:「对此世间的蕴、界、处不善巧、不熟练」。此理同样适用于「对他世间不善巧」,故说:「对他世间亦复如是」。“魔罗的境界”:魔罗安住于此中。此处的“魔罗”当知为烦恼魔。因为,对于烦恼魔之运转,诸行蕴被执取,死魔则别别执取,而正是依于烦恼魔,天子魔方于欲有中得其统治。「他们」:指那些对此世间等不熟练之人。为以最显著者标明他们,故说:「以此显示六师外道」。显示巴利原文
Yesu khandhāyatanadhātūsu idha lokasamaññā, te ajānantā ‘‘akusalā imassa lokassā’’ti vuttāti āha ‘‘idhaloke khandhadhātāyatanesu akusalā achekā’’ti. Ayameva nayo ‘‘akusalā parassa lokassā’’ti etthāpīti āha ‘‘paralokepi eseva nayo’’ti. Māro ettha dhīyatīti māradheyyaṃ. Māroti cettha kilesamāro veditabbo. Khandhābhisaṅkhārā hi tassa pavattanabhāvena gahitā, maccumāro visuṃ gahito eva, kilesamāravaseneva ca devaputtamārassa kāmabhave ādhipaccanti. Tesanti ye idhalokādīsu achekā, tesaṃ. Te pana ukkaṭṭhaniddesena dassento āha ‘‘iminā cha satthāro dassitā’’ti.
351 「力牛」:指强壮的牛。它们是已被调伏的公牛与母牛,故说:「被调伏的公牛与母牛」。「未生牛」:指尚未分娩的母牛。「犊」:指小牛犊。此处 ka- 字表“小”义,故说“幼小的牛犊”。「瘦弱」:即虚弱无力。显示巴利原文
351.Balavagāvoti balavante gorūpe. Te pana dammataṃ upagatagoṇā ceva dhenuyo cāti āha ‘‘dantagoṇe ceva dhenuyo cā’’ti . Avijātagāvoti na vijātagāviyo. Vacchaketi khuddakavacche. Appattho hi ayaṃ ka-saddo. Tenāha ‘‘taruṇavacchake’’ti. Kisābalaketi dubbale.
352 「切断魔罗的渴爱之流」:断除了与蕴魔相应的、名为渴爱的烦恼之流。「灭尽三部分而住」:这是针对不来者所说。「所有情况」:指一来者、入流者、第八位的情况。其中,依次有灭尽四道所断烦恼中二部分而住者、灭尽一部分而住者,以及正在灭尽第一部分者。「随法行者」:随念法,或具有随法习性的人,此中“法”特指智慧。「随信行者」:随念信,或具有随信习性的人。显示巴利原文
352.Mārassa taṇhāsotaṃ chetvāti khandhamārasambandhītaṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ sotaṃ samucchinditvā. Tayo koṭṭhāse khepetvā ṭhitāti anāgāmino sandhāyāha. Sabbavāresūti sakadāgāmisotāpannaaṭṭhamakavāresu. Tattha pana yathākkamaṃ catumaggavajjhānaṃ kilesānaṃ dve koṭṭhāse khepetvā ṭhitā, ekakoṭṭhāsaṃ khepetvā ṭhitā, paṭhamaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ khepentoti vattabbaṃ. Dhammaṃ anussaranti, dhammassa vā anussaraṇasīlāti dhammānusārino. Dhammoti cettha paññā adhippetā. Saddhaṃ anussaranti, saddhāya vā anussaraṇasīlāti saddhānusārino.
「知者」:因为认知行为的对象没有被特别限定,根据语境,它指的是遍知一切法的知者,故说“以知一切法者”。又因为没有内在精髓而高高耸起,如同芦苇,故称为「慢芦苇」,因此说“已作无慢芦苇”。「希求安稳」:由于从四种轭中不再有灾祸,这里的“安稳”指阿拉汉果。而这种希求是善法欲所摄的愿望,并非渴爱,故说“以善法欲而希求阿拉汉果”。对于证得那个果位,确实没有任何障碍。为了安稳地渡至彼岸而开始说法,又以证得安稳而结束说法,佛陀正是循着这样一脉相贯的脉络而完成说法。显示巴利原文
Jānatāti ettha jānanakiriyāvisayassa avisesitattā adhikāravasena anavasesañeyyavisesā adhippetāti āha ‘‘sabbadhamme jānantenā’’ti. Antosāravirahato abbhuggataṭṭhena ca naḷo viyāti naḷo, mānoti āha ‘‘vigatamānanaḷaṃ kata’’nti. Khemaṃ patthethāti ettha catūhi yogehi anupaddavattā ‘‘khema’’nti arahattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Patthanā ca chandapatthanā, na taṇhāpatthanāti āha ‘‘kattukamyatāchandena arahattaṃ patthethā’’ti. Pattāyeva nāma tassa pattiyā na koci antarāyo. Sotthinā pāragamanaṃ uddissa desanaṃ ārabhitvā khemappattiyā desanāya pariyosāpitattā yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti.
《小牧牛人经》的义注,阐明隐密义理的部分已经圆满结束了。显示巴利原文
Cūḷagopālakasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.
5. 《小萨遮迦经》的义注显示巴利原文
5. Cūḷasaccakasuttavaṇṇanā
353 「以天鹅圆阵隐蔽」:即被天鹅圆阵所覆蔽,意思是以天鹅群般的圆环阵型来隐蔽。显示巴利原文
353.Haṃsavaṭṭakacchannenāti haṃsavaṭṭakapaṭicchannena, haṃsamaṇḍalākārenāti attho.
他们说,凭此而说故称为“论”(vādo),亦即方法、道路。说什么呢?说更高的(uttaraṃ)。种种论说集成百数,即百论。“尼干陀有五百论,尼干陀女有五百论”——如此,尼干陀与尼干陀女各各学习、受持五百论后四处游走。他们从行为上提问,但从外在形相便知其尼干陀身份。因此说“我将提出论说”。显示巴利原文
Vadanti etenāti vādo, maggo. Kiṃ vadanti? Uttaraṃ. Vādānaṃ satāni vādasatāni. ‘‘Nigaṇṭho pañcavādasatāni, nigaṇṭhī pañcavādasatānī’’ti evaṃ nigaṇṭhoca nigaṇṭhī ca pañca pañca vādasatāni uggahetvā vicarantā. Kiriyato te pucchiṃsu, liṅgato pana nigaṇṭhabhāvo ñāto. Tenāha ‘‘ahaṃ vādaṃ āropessāmī’’ti.
保持清醒,指以打扫等方式保持觉醒。divātaraṃ(过早):即太过早。当那些女游行者问“谁提问,谁回答?”时,长老说:“提问当归我们。”提问是论辩的前分。你们热衷辩论、乐著辩论,高举旗帜而行,因此论辩的前分理当归于我辈;然而,由于你们是女人,便将此前分让与你们,于是说:“你们是女人,便请先问吧。”那些女游行者每人问二百五十论,合计问一千论。犹如以利剑断莲花梗,又有何难?同样,已证无碍解、于声闻弟子中智慧最为第一的法将军,回答凡夫所构想的问题,又有何难?因此经文说“长老以剑”等等。此处,“解开结缚”(nijjaṭaṃ niggaṇṭhiṃ katvā)意为令其再不能在那里打结;他解开结缚后为她们说法。这位长老犹如在四支具足的黑暗中点亮千盏灯一般,于他人所不能及、如同暗昧的问题,甫一被问便即刻解答。那些女游行者见到长老智慧明达,又因自己是最后身,无法再立于慢心,便说:“尊者,我们所知仅此而已。”“长老的领域”(显示巴利原文
Jagganto sammajjanādivasena. Divātaranti atidivaṃ. ‘‘Kassa pucchā, kassa vissajjanaṃ hotū’’ti paribbājikāhi vutte thero āha ‘‘pucchā nāma amhākaṃ pattā’’ti. Pucchā vādānaṃ pubbapakkho, yasmā tumhe vādapasutā vādābhiratā dhajaṃ paggayha vicaratha, tasmā vādānaṃ pubbapakkho amhākaṃ patto, evaṃ santepi tumhākaṃ mātugāmabhāvato pubbapakkhaṃ demāti āha ‘‘tumhe pana mātugāmā nāma paṭhamaṃ pucchathā’’ti. Tā paribbājikā ekekā aḍḍhateyyasatavādamaggaṃ pucchantiyo vādasahassaṃ pucchiṃsu. Yathā nisitassa khaggassa kumudanāḷacchedane kimatthi bhāriyaṃ, evaṃ paṭisambhidāppattassa sāvakesu paññavantānaṃ aggabhāve ṭhitassa dhammasenāpatino puthujjanaparikappitapañhavissajjane kimatthi bhāriyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘thero khaggenā’’tiādi. Tattha nijjaṭaṃ niggaṇṭhiṃ katvāti yathā tā puna tattha jaṭaṃ gaṇṭhiṃ kātuṃ na visahanti, tathā vijaṭetvā kathesi. Ayaṃ thero caturaṅgasamannāgate andhakāre sahassavaṭṭikaṃ dīpento viya aññesaṃ avisaye andhakārabhūte pañhe pucchitamatteyeva vissajjesīti therassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ disvā sayañca antimabhavikatāya kohaññe ṭhātuṃ asakkontiyo ‘‘ettakameva, bhante, mayaṃ jānāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Therassa visayanti therassa paññāvisayaṃ.
“他们既不见边,也不见极”(neva antaṃ na koṭiṃ addasaṃsu):因为所言“一”实有多义,故对彼问题的义理,何为边、何为终极的尽头,他们未见、未了知。长老观察她们的意乐,见有出家之好乐,便问:“现在你们将如何做呢?”“更上之智”(uttaritarapañño):凭借对论道的熟悉及本身的聪慧,她们虽有如此智慧,而长老的智慧更胜于此。显示巴利原文
Neva antaṃ na koṭiṃ addasaṃsūti ekanti vattabbassa bahubhāvato tassā pucchāya attho evamanto evamavasānakoṭīti na passiṃsu na jāniṃsu. Thero tāsaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ olokento pabbajjāruciṃ disvā āha ‘‘idāni kiṃ karissathā’’ti? Uttaritarapaññoti vādamaggaparicayena medhāvitāya ca yādisā tāsaṃ paññā, tato uttaritarapañño.
「论道」(kathāmagga)即指辩论的途径。因此,以种种关于毁谤他宗等言论,用种种方式讲述辩论途径的人,便称为「善辩者」(bhassappavādaka)。「辩才者」(paṇḍitavādo)是指宣称“我是智者、我是精微、我是多闻”的人。他凭星宿运行作种种预言:依星宿运行的时间知识,说出“某日将有月食,某日将有日食”等预兆。「善得者」(sādhuladdhiko):因获得智慧成就而称为善妙。「所举」(āropito):指他的论辩被举出了宗、因、喻等过失,这称为所举论。当举发过失的论者压倒对方时,可能引起对方体内界种紊乱;由于心念散乱,他因那过失而构思的论点便受震动。「柱」(thūṇaṃ):指身体被震动,故有此说。‘柱’实为血、胆汁、痰的异名,因为它们维持着全身。此外还有一种‘柱句’,是那些执持论道者的一种论述方式。萨遮迦则出于自慢,想凭自己的辩才震慑他人,所以说:‘纵使我是一根柱子……’等等。声闻的律即是学处,而学处也就是显示巴利原文
Kathāmaggoti vādamaggo. Tasmā tehi tehi parappavādādīhi bhassaṃ vādamaggaṃ pakārehi vadetīti bhassappavādako. Paṇḍitavādoti ahaṃ paṇḍito nipuṇo bahussutoti evaṃvādī. Yaṃ yaṃ nakkhattācārena ādisatīti nakkhattagatiyā kālañāṇena ‘‘asukadivase candaggāho bhavissati, sūriyaggāho bhavissatī’’tiādinā yaṃ yaṃ ādesaṃ bhaṇati. Sādhuladdhiko ñāṇasampattiyā sundaro. Āropitoti paṭiññāhetunidassanādidosaṃ upari āropito vādo svāropito. Dosapadaṃ āropentena vādinā paravādimhi abhibhuyya tassa dhātukkhobhopi siyā, cittavikkhepena yena doso tena saṅkappito sampavedhitoti. Thūṇanti sarīraṃ khobhitanti katvā. Thūṇanti hi lohitapittasemhānaṃ adhivacanaṃ sabbaṅgasarīradhāraṇato. Apica thūṇapado nāma atthi kathāmaggo vādamaggaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ. Saccako pana kohaññe ṭhatvā attano vādappabhedavasena pare vimhāpento ‘‘thūṇaṃ cepāha’’ntiādimāha. Sāvakānaṃ vinayaṃ nāma sikkhāpadaṃ, tañca dhammadesanā hotīti esā eva cassa anusāsanīti vinayanādimukhena sammāsambuddhassa mataṃ sāsanaṃ pucchanto saccako ‘‘kathaṃ pana, bho, assajī’’tiādimāha. Athassa thero ‘‘lakkhaṇattayakathā nāma anaññasādhāraṇā buddhāveṇikā dhammadesanā, tatra ca mayā aniccakathāya samuṭṭhāpitāya taṃ asahanto saccako tucchamānena paṭapaṭāyanto kurumāno licchavī gahetvā bhagavato santikaṃ āgamissati, athassa bhagavā vādaṃ madditvā aniccanti patiṭṭhapento dhammaṃ kathessati, tadā bhavissati vijahitavādo sammāpaṭipattiyā patiṭṭhito’’ti cintetvā aniccānattalakkhaṇapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ bhagavato anusāsanaṃ dassento ‘‘evaṃ, bho, aggivessanā’’tiādimāha.
为何此处不取苦相?故说“然而长老”等。为详释“有遭责备的机会”这一略说,而说“道果”等。其中,「以方便」(pariyāyena):即依行苦之方便而说。「此」(ayaṃ)指萨遮迦。“这不是你们的教法”:你们所安住之处,并非一切知者的教法,因为不能从苦中出离;相反,那实为大杀戮之处,又因被说成是大苦,故名为地狱增盛,即增长地狱,因此你们全无快乐的希望。「起来又起来」(uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya):指付出努力,使苦不断消耗,全然在受苦中周游徘徊。这一切纯是他的邪思。何以故?因为这里的无简别之说,实与苦谛相连。为了遍知,才于世尊之处修梵行。道果作为行,依“凡是无常的,那就是苦”这一原则,在方便意义上被视为苦,并非在无方便的意义上视为苦。故说“因此”等。不合听闻,因为是邪说,这是其意旨。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ aggahitanti āha ‘‘thero panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Upārambhassa okāso hotī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘maggaphalānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pariyāyenāti saṅkhāradukkhatāpariyāyena. Ayanti saccako. Nayidaṃ tumhākaṃ sāsanaṃ nāmāti yattha tumhe avaṭṭhitā, idaṃ tumhākaṃ sabbaññusāsanaṃ nāma na hoti dukkhato anissaraṇattā, atha kho mahāāghātanaṃ nāmetaṃ, mahādukkhaniddiṭṭhattā pana nirayussado nāma ussadanirayo nāma, tasmā natti nāma tumhākaṃ sukhāsā. Uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāyāti ussukkaṃ katvā, dukkhameva jīrāpentā sabbaso dukkhameva anubhavantā, āhiṇḍatha vicarathāti. Sabbamidaṃ tassa micchāparikappitameva. Kasmā? Dukkhasaccūpasañhitāyeva hettha nippariyāyakathā nāma. Tassa hi pariññatthaṃ bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussati. Maggaphalāni saṅkhārabhāvena ‘‘yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkha’’nti pariyāyato dukkhaṃ, na nippariyāyato. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Sotuṃ ayuttaṃ micchāvādattāti adhippāyo.
354 354. 「与义利教诫共处之屋」(saha atthānusāsanaṃ agāraṃ)即集会堂(sandhāgāra);王族安立议事之屋也称为集会堂,此处即指在那个集会堂中。于某时,即于如是之时,因在此商议处理国王事务,故称集会堂,亦指在那个集会堂中。「已确立」(patiṭṭhitaṃ):指已认定“无常、无我”。「现在即转身背向」:不看世尊的面额,转身以背相对。在酒馆(surāghare):即酿酒之家。「粉席」(piṭṭhakilañjaṃ):放置粉的席子。「毛」(vālaṃ):指筛子。「为作麻衣」(sāṇasāṭakakaraṇatthaṃ):用以制作麻衣的线等物,为此目的。这些里面有麻皮,故称麻皮,即麻杆。取之捶打清洗麻,如同游戏一般,如说“打优昙花,打麻”等。「他成为什么而存在」(kiṃ so bhavamāno):他成了什么状态而如此存在?对于世间至高之人正自觉者的举难,必须具备超越那以上的英勇特质,以夜叉等状态存在,才能胜任。而这个只有微弱威力的,如同毗舍遮之显示巴利原文
354. Saha atthānusāsanaṃ agāranti sandhāgāraṃ, rājakulānaṃ santhāpanaagārantipi sandhāgāraṃ, tasmiṃ santhāgāreti attho. Ekasmiṃ kāle tādise kāle rājakiccānaṃ santhānamettha vicārentīti sandhāgāraṃ, tasmiṃ santhāgāretipi attho. Patiṭṭhitanti ‘‘aniccaṃ anattā’’ti ca paṭiññātaṃ. Idāneva piṭṭhiṃ parivattentoti bhagavato nalāṭaṃ anoloketvā vimukhabhāvaṃ āpajjanto. Surāghareti surāsampādakagehe. Piṭṭhakilañjanti piṭṭhaṭhapanakiḷañjaṃ. Vālanti caṅgavāraṃ. Sāṇasāṭakakaraṇatthanti sāṇasāṭakaṃ karonti etenāti sāṇasāṭakakaraṇaṃ, suttaṃ, tadatthaṃ. Sāṇavākā etesu santīti sāṇavākā, sāṇadaṇḍā. Te gahetvā sāṇānaṃ dhovanasadisaṃ kīḷitajātaṃ yathā ‘‘uddālapupphabhañjikā, sāṇabhañjikā’’ti ca. Kiṃ so bhavamānoti kīdiso hutvā so bhavamāno, kiṃ honto loke aggapuggalassa sammāsambuddhassa vādāropanaṃ nāma tato uttaritarasūraguṇo eva yakkhādibhāvena so bhavamāno abhisambhuṇeyya. Ayaṃ pana appānubhāvatāya pisācarūpo kiṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ niddāyanto ajja pabujjhitvā evaṃ vadatīti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘kiṃ yakkho’’tiādi.
355 “大正午时”:是指正午的大时分,即太阳运行到天空正中的时刻。“白昼精勤修行者”:指那些专精修习的行者。“示现规矩后”:指在午后进入昼间住所之前,展示并遵行了应做之规矩后。“示现世尊”:为表对世尊的恭敬尊重,将双手结成莲花蕾状,向上举起,以此指示世尊。显示巴利原文
355.Mahāmajjhanhikasamayeti mahati majjhanhikakāle, gaganamajjhe sūriyagatavelāya. Divāpadhānikā padhānānuyuñjakā. Vattaṃ dassetvāti pacchābhattaṃ divāvihārūpagamanato pubbe kātabbavattaṃ dassetvā paṭipajjitvā. Bhagavantaṃ dassentoti bhagavati gāravabahumānaṃ vibhāvento ubho hatthe kamalamakulākāre katvā ukkhippa bhagavantaṃ dassento.
“就此而言”:是针对那不可限量的数目而言,因此说“以广大的离车族众”。“只以头撞击地面,就算是行礼了吗?”“狡诈者”:指谄曲的人。“开脱”:指从施食的义务中开脱出去。“就像丢下的泥团一样”:指就像往低处扔下的泥团那样。“不论何处”:指不说适合自己身份的话,只是随处漫谈。显示巴利原文
Taṃ sandhāyāti taṃ aparicchinnagaṇanaṃ sandhāya evaṃ ‘‘mahatiyā licchaviparisāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiṃ sīsena bhūmiṃ paharanteneva vandanā katā hoti? Kerāṭikāti saṭhā. Mocentāti bhikkhādānato mocentā. Avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍo viyāti heṭṭhākhittamattikāpiṇḍo viya. Yattha katthacīti attano anurūpaṃ vacanaṃ asallapento yattha katthaci.
356 “可见这是它的结果”:依此能指出、能显示,故称为“处”,即原因。而那个原因本身因为是它生起的所在,所以也称为“处”。因此说“某处,也就是某个机会、某个原因”。“处所”即是地方,在“这是非处、没有机会”等语句中,原因也被称为处所。当你想问时,他们不会说,因为他们的允诺是遍及一切法、无所遗漏的。“你们”:即你们的。对于夜叉……乃至……对于游方者,在这里,“贤者,当你想问时”等提问的话语,应依次对应结合。显示巴利原文
356. Dissati ‘‘idaṃ imassa phala’’nti apadissati etenāti deso, kāraṇaṃ, tadeva tassa pavattiṭṭhānatāya okāsoti āha ‘‘kañcideva desanti kañci okāsaṃ kiñci kāraṇa’’nti. Okāso ṭhānanti ca kāraṇaṃ vuccati ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.161; ma. ni. 3.128-131; a. ni. 1.268-295; vibha. 809). Yadākaṅkhasīti na vadanti anavasesadhammavisayattā paṭiññāya. Tumhanti tumhākaṃ. Yakkha…pe… paribbājakānanti ettha ‘‘pucchāvuso, yadākaṅkhasī’’tiādīni (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. āḷavakasutta) pucchāvacanāni yathākkamaṃ yojetabbāni.
「了知此世间与他世众生的意乐后」:这是大士让他亲眼见到地狱与天界之后所说话语。显示巴利原文
Ñatvāsayaṃ lokamimaṃ parañcāti idaṃ mahāsatto nirayaṃ saggañca tesaṃ paccakkhato dassetvā āha.
「确实,我当为你说,如同善巧者那般」:意思是,如同极善巧的一切知者所了知、所宣说的方式,我也将那样为你讲说。然而,由于他不知其中的缘由与无关缘由,所以他说:「国王或行,或不行,然而我必定为你说。」显示巴利原文
Taggha te ahamakkhissaṃ, yathāpi kusalo tathāti yathā pakārena sukusalo sabbaññū jānāti katheti, tathā ahaṃ kathessāmi. Tassa pana kāraṇaṃ akāraṇañca avijānanto rājānaṃ karotu vā mā vā, ahaṃ pana te akkhissāmīti āha ‘‘rājā ca kho…pe… na vā’’ti.
「以所说的方式而说」:是指世尊将以三转法轮的开示来解说这苦相。然而,为了在此处避免留下「这是声闻弟子阿说示以另一种方式所说,沙门乔达摩以另一种方式所说」这样的话柄,世尊便不触及苦相,唯独随顺长老所说的方式,只开示无常、无我相。当世尊宣说「色无我,……乃至识无我」时,萨遮迦不接受,想要以譬喻来说明义理。他把自己作为所譬喻的对象,如同说「这头牛如野牛」那样,想以譬喻的分量来成立其论点,因此说道:「乔达摩尊者,我生起了一个譬喻。」意思是:我将为你作一个譬喻,透过这个譬喻,此处有些有智之人也能了知所说之语的义理。世尊说道:「让它生起吧,火种居士。」意思是:你那所谓的「我」,是无法用百种譬喻或任何其他的量来获得确立的。正如「我」不可得一样,那个量也同样完全不可得。为什么呢?因为在究竟义上,所谓「我」是彻底不可得、确切无所获得的,而能证明它的那种补特伽罗之量也同样不可得。因此,世尊说「放心地提出你的譬喻来吧」,其意思是:你的我论并不能因此得到确立。显示巴利原文
Kathitaniyāmeneva kathentoti teparivaṭṭakathāya dukkhalakkhaṇampesa kathessati, idha pana aññathā sāvakena assajinā kathitaṃ, aññathā samaṇena gotamenāti vacanokāsapariharaṇatthaṃ dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ anāmasitvā therena kathitaniyāmeneva aniccānattalakkhaṇameva kathentena bhagavatā – ‘‘rūpaṃ anattā yāva viññāṇaṃ anattā’’ti vutte saccako taṃ asampaṭicchanto upamāya atthañāpane upamāpamāṇaṃ yathā ‘‘go viya gavayo’’ti attānaṃ upameyyaṃ katvā upamāpamāṇena patiṭṭhāpetukāmo āha ‘‘upamā maṃ, bho gotama, paṭibhātī’’ti, upamaṃ te karissāmi, upamāyapidhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṃ ājānantīti adhippāyo. Bhagavā upamāsatena, aññena vāpi pamāṇena tava attā patiṭṭhāpetuṃ na labbhā attano viya pamāṇassapi anupalabbhanatoti āha ‘‘paṭibhātu taṃ aggivessanā’’ti. Yathā hi attā nāma koci paramatthato na upalabbhati ekaṃsena anupaladdhito, evassa ñāpakapuggalaṃ pamāṇampi na upalabbhati. Tenāha ‘‘āhara taṃupamaṃ vissattho’’ti, na tena tava attavādo patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti adhippāyo.
凡于人身见有身表之福非福,由此可知此人是色身;同样,凡于人身见有苦乐感受,凡见青等之想,凡见贪嗔等之行,凡于人身见有对境之识别,由此可知此人是识身。如此,以色等为相之我,即于一切身中领受苦乐善恶业果。且必应如此接受,否则业果之理便不得成立。为明此义,故有“以此说明何义”等语。其中,“他们”指众生。“依止”意为依托。先言“此人是色身”等,将色等诸法执为我,而后又说“依色而住”等,此尼犍子实自坏其宗,因已显所依与能依无别故。以色等本身即具受等自性,即是自我,盖由他们而见有福等造作。于此,他们被执为众生、以我自性之存在者,即是依之而见有福等造作之所依,正如天人中之所见;而他们被执为众生、与此相异非众生自性者,则如木石等中所见。为证成此义并出因由,尼犍子乃举譬喻,故云“彼极有理地举出譬喻”。然当知彼固持“种子草木亦有情”之见,如所谓“应作力之人”之用例,故引为相似例证。若谓……显示巴利原文
Yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ kāyikaṃ vā puññāpuññaṃ purisapuggale upalabbhati, tena viññāyati rūpattāyaṃ purisapuggalo, tathā yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sukhadukkhapaṭisaṃvedanaṃ purisapuggale upalabbhati, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ nīlādisañjānanaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ rajjanadussanādi, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇapaṭivijānanaṃ purisapuggale upalabbhati, tena viññāyati viññāṇattāyaṃ purisapuggaloti. Evaṃ rūpādilakkhaṇo attā tattha tattha kāye kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, evañcetaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, aññathā kammaphalasambandho na yujjeyyāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘iminā kiṃ dīpetī’’tiādimāha. Tattha teti sattā. Patiṭṭhāyāti nissāya. ‘‘Rūpattāyaṃ purisapuggalo’’tiādinā rūpādidhamme ‘‘attā’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘rūpe patiṭṭhāyā’’tiādiṃ vadanto ayaṃ nigaṇṭho attano vādaṃ bhindati patiṭṭhānassa, patiṭṭhāyakassa ca abhedadīpanato. Rūpādayo vedanādisabhāvā attā tannissayena puññādikiriyāsamupaladdhito idha yaṃ nissāya puññādikiriyā samupalabbhati, te rūpādayo sattasaññitā attasabhāvā diṭṭhā yathā taṃ devatādīsu, ye pana sattasaññitā tato aññe asattasabhāvā diṭṭhā yathā taṃ kaṭṭhakaliṅgarādīsūti evaṃ sādhetabbaṃ atthaṃ sahetuṃ katvā dassento nigaṇṭho nidassanaṃ ānesīti āha ‘‘ativiya sakāraṇaṃ katvā upamaṃ āharī’’ti. Tassa pana ‘‘balakaraṇīyā’’ti vuttapurisappayogā viya bījagāmabhūtagāmāpi sajīvā evāti laddhīti te sadisūdāharaṇabhāvena vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sace pana ye jīvassa ādhāraṇabhāvena sahitena pavattetabbabhāvena sallakkhetabbā, te sajīvāti icchitā, na kevalena pavattetabbabhāvena. Evaṃ sati ‘‘balakaraṇīyā kammantā’’ti vadantena visadisūdāharaṇabhāvena upanītanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
能摧破我论、安立无我者,唯是善逝之不共功德,实无有能及者。而今诸圣教弟子各随其力而行此二事,乃是立于诸佛所授之方轨,随顺他们之教说而行。“令退转”即驱摈、剥离之义。“整个毗舍离”是以依止之迂回言说,指依于一切毗舍离住民之人而说,如言“村庄来了”。“聚集”即会合、集于一处之义。显示巴利原文
Samattho nāma natthi attavādabhañjanassa anattatāpatiṭṭhāpanassa ca sugatāveṇikattā. Yaṃ panetarahi sāsanikā yathāsatti tadubhayaṃ karonti, taṃ buddhehi dinnanaye ṭhatvā tesaṃ desanānusārato. Nivattetvāti nīharitvā, visuṃ katvāti attho. Sakalaṃ vesālinti sabbavesālivāsinaṃ janaṃ nissayūpacārena nissitaṃ vadati yathā ‘‘gāmo āgato’’ti. Saṃvaṭṭitvāti sampiṇḍitvā, ekajjhaṃ gahetvāti attho.
357 “确立”意为令彼作出允诺,使其不舍彼主张。“杀”字本有伤害之义,诸明文声论师即由此衍生出“tāya”一词,欲成立“能杀者”之语形,故说为“应杀”。“应令生”等,亦同此理。“亦堪转起”中之“ma”为连音字。世尊不言“转起”而说“亦堪转起”,是以第二词特显其义。显示巴利原文
357.Patiṭṭhapetvāti yathā taṃ vādaṃ na avajānāti, evaṃ paṭiññaṃ kāretvāti attho. Ghāti-saddo hiṃsanattho, tato ca saddavidū arahatthaṃ tāya-saddaṃ uppādetvā ghātetāyanti rūpasiddhiṃ icchantīti āha ‘‘ghātāraha’’nti. Jāpetāyantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Vattituñca marahatīti ma-kāro padasandhikaro. Visesetvā dīpetīti ‘‘vattati’’icceva avatvā ‘‘vattituñca marahatī’’ti dutiyena padena bhagavatā vuttaṃ visesetvā dīpeti.
“庄严”指具足可爱之形,一切支分圆满。“善加装饰”因此即是一切时皆善加装束的样子。“如是”是指为了说明那样而说“丑陋”等。“在此处”指在“你对此色有主宰力吗”这一理由的把握中。因为世尊正是依据这一理由:“有主宰力……乃至令其不要如此”。由此显示色是无我,因为不能随己意自在主宰。凡不能自在主宰者,便被视为无我,如同资具等。“论”指他将以过失、责难来加于对方。头破七分:在与如来的如法论议中,若被问及却不作答,以此造成恼害,到第三次时,该恼害者的头便会依法则裂成七分,正如那个面对世尊的自称一切智者一样。然而金刚手为何站在那里?他如同世尊一般悲悯,化作大恐怖相,想使他惊惧而放弃此见,因此在他前方的虚空中持金刚而立,并非想要破其头。因为在世尊面前,对任何人都不曾有不幸。而注释书只说“被问”,是由于世尊一向只问如法的问题。显示巴利原文
Pāsādikaṃ abhirūpanti abhimatarūpasampannaṃ sabbāvayavaṃ. Tato eva susajjitaṃ sabbakālaṃ suṭṭhu sajjitākārameva. Evaṃvidhanti yādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṃ dasseti ‘‘dubbaṇṇa’’ntiādinā. Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti ‘‘vattati te tasmiṃ rūpe vaso’’ti etasmiṃ kāraṇaggahaṇe. Kāraṇañhetaṃ bhagavatā gahitaṃ ‘‘vattati…pe… mā ahosī’’ti. Tenetaṃ dasseti rūpaṃ anattā avasavattanato, yañhi vase na vattati, taṃ anattakameva diṭṭhaṃ yathā taṃ sampatti. Vādanti dosaṃ niggahaṃ āropessati. Sattadhā muddhā phalatīti sahadhammikasākacchāhi tathāgate, pucchante abyākaraṇena vihesāya kayiramānattā tatiye vāre dhammatāvasena vihesakassa sattadhā muddhā phalati yathā taṃ sabbaññupaṭiññāya bhagavato sammukhabhāvūpagamane. Vajirapāṇi pana kasmā ṭhito hotīti? Bhagavā viya anukampamāno mahantaṃ bhayānakaṃ rūpaṃ māpetvā tāsetvā imaṃ diṭṭhiṃ vissajjāpemīti tassa purato ākāse vajiraṃ āharanto tiṭṭhati, na muddhaṃ phāletukāmo. Na hi bhagavato purato kassaci anattho nāma hoti. Yasmā pana bhagavā ekaṃsato sahadhammikameva pañhaṃ pucchati, tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘pucchite’’icceva vuttaṃ.
“炽燃的”:意思是正在燃烧的。“眼与鼻等”:通过“等”字,含摄了形如羊头的须发等相状。在说了“为令其舍弃邪见而来的”之后,为了显示这并非随己意而来,而是最初就把大梵天推在前面、依自己许下的承诺而来,所以说“而且”等句。“它”指金刚手。那是萨遮迦由于承诺而回转的原因。“是否还有其他的呢”等句,是显示萨遮迦的试探心态。因为如果不是先试探,看到金刚手后可能会说“大夜叉”,那样对他就不合适了。而萨遮迦则思察到其他人并不害怕,作出判断:“他们肯定没看见夜叉,所以只有我产生了恐惧。”于是他便依理而行。显示巴利原文
Ādittanti dippamānaṃ. Akkhināsādīnīti ādi-saddena eḷakasīsasadisakesamassuādīnaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Diṭṭhivissajjāpanattha’’nti vatvā nayidaṃ yadicchāvasena āgamanaṃ, atha kho ādito mahābrahmānaṃ purato katvā attanā katapaṭiññāvasenāti dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Nti vajirapāṇiṃ. Taṃ saccakassa paṭiññāya parivattanakāraṇaṃ. Aññepi nu khotiādi saccakassa vīmaṃsakabhāvadassanaṃ. Avīmaṃsakena hi taṃ disvā mahāyakkhoti vadeyya, tenassa asāruppaṃ siyā, ayaṃ pana aññesaṃ abhītabhāvaṃ upadhāretvā ‘‘addhāme yakkhaṃ na passanti, tasmā mayhameva bhayaṃ uppanna’’nti tīretvā yuttappattavasena paṭipajji.
358 “思察后”:是指对于所应记说的义理,进行了仔细辨认。“同样之理”:意思是,对于行和识,也如同对于想一样,遵循同样的道理。“依所说相反之理”:应知的义理是:“愿那不善的苦受不要生起,愿那与忧俱行的不善之想不要生起”等等。“如落在要害之处的毒”:如同落在一切众生要害处的毒。“已附着”:指已紧密黏着。“已接近”:指并未远离。“已吞下”:指吞下后安住不动。“遍知”:指从各个方面毫无遗漏地完全了知。“遍尽”:是指为了使其未来不再生起,而以一切方式将其完全灭尽。而那如是的状态,被称为“引至灭尽、坏灭”,因此说“引至灭尽、坏灭、不再生起”。显示巴利原文
358.Upadhāretvāti byākātabbamatthaṃ sallakkhetvā. Eseva nayoti saṅkhāraviññāṇesupi saññāya viya nayoti attho. Vuttavipariyāyenāti ‘‘akusalā dukkhā vedanā mā ahosi, akusalā domanassasampayuttā saññā mā ahosī’’tiādinā nayena attho veditabbo. Sappadaṭṭhavisanti sabbasattānaṃ sappadaṭṭhaṭṭhāne sarīrapadese patitaṃ visaṃ. Allīnoti saṃsiliṭṭho. Upagatoti na apagato. Ajjhositoti gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā ṭhito. Parito jāneyyāti samantato sabbaso kiñcipi asesetvā jāneyya. Parikkhepetvāti āyatiṃ anuppattidhammatāpādanavasena sabbaso khepetvā. Tathābhūto cassa khayavayaṃ upaneti nāmāti āha ‘‘khayaṃ vayaṃ anuppādaṃ upanetvā’’ti.
359 由于自己的论说没有实质,或者所设想的那种实质并不存在,因此内里缺少坚实,便是“空洞”。「显示其过恶」(Vippakāranti):即从见解与戒行上,揭露他们的邪曲、有过失与过恶。「叶薄」(Sinnapattoti):即叶片已变薄。「破裂」(Viphāritanti):即已裂开。显示巴利原文
359. Attano vādassa asārabhāvato, yathāparikappitassa vā sārassa abhāvato antosāravirahito ritto. Vippakāranti diṭṭhiyā sīlācārassa ca vasena virūpataṃ sāparādhataṃ sāvajjataṃ tesaṃ upari āropetvā. Sinnapattoti tanukapatto. Viphāritanti viphāḷitaṃ.
「惯于对付无实之树」(Asārakarukkhaparicitoti):意指惯于砍伐如紫矿等无实之木。「坚硬性」(Thaddhabhāvanti):指已经成熟的性质,也就是锐利之性。「并非总无」(Natthīti):并不是总没有,不应那样说。「在大众中」(Parisatīti):即在四众集会中。因此说“系好腰带,遮掩身体”。「犹如登上压榨机」(Yantāruḷhassa viyāti):意指如同为了求得记说含义而登上压榨机的那个人。显示巴利原文
Asārakarukkhaparicitoti palāsādiasārarukkhakoṭṭane kataparicayo. Thaddhabhāvanti vipakkabhāvaṃ, tikkhabhāvanti attho. Natthīti sadā natthīti na vattabbaṃ. Parisatīti catuparisamajjhe . Tathā hi ‘‘gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā paṭicchannasarīrā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yantāruḷhassa viyāti byākaraṇatthaṃ vāyamayantaṃ āruḷhassa viya.
360 「见之针刺」(Diṭṭhivisūkānīti):即见的荆棘。「见之游走」(Diṭṭhisañcaritānīti):即见的撞击。「见之颤动」(Diṭṭhivipphanditānīti):即见的动摇。「了知他们的意趣」(Tesaṃ adhippāyaṃ ñatvāti):即从那些离车族王子们的动摇中,了知他们内心的意向。因此说了“这些”等。显示巴利原文
360.Diṭṭhivisūkānīti diṭṭhikiñcakāni. Diṭṭhisañcaritānīti diṭṭhitāḷanāni. Diṭṭhivipphanditānīti diṭṭhiiñjitāni. Tesaṃ adhippāyaṃ ñatvāti tesaṃ licchavikumārānaṃ iñjiteneva ajjhāsayaṃ jānitvā. Tenāha ‘‘ime’’tiādi.
361 当证得此时,于师之教中无所畏,不为他人所引夺,此智慧即是无所畏的状态,因此说为“无所畏”,即“得无所畏”,意指证得智慧。由此,他不需要他人再来令其信受,这就是“不依他”。不需要相信他人所说,这就是“不仰赖他人”。虽然萨遮迦不知道有学地、无学地这些教内术语,但由于他在“看见”这一动作中表述了尚在进行的状况,因此他知道:“仅仅这样,比丘的事还没有完成。”于是他生起了“那么,到了什么程度呢?”的提问。因此说“由于说了看见”等。显示巴利原文
361. Yasmiṃ adhigate puggalo satthusāsane visārado hoti parehi asaṃhāriyo, taṃ ñāṇaṃ visāradassa bhāvoti katvā vesārajjanti āha ‘‘vesārajjappattoti ñāṇappatto’’ti. Tato evamassa na paro paccetabbo etassa atthīti aparappaccayo. Na paro pattiyo saddahātabbo etassa atthīti aparappattiyo. Kāmaṃ saccako sekkhabhūmi asekkhabhūmīti idaṃ sāsanavohāraṃ na jānāti. Passatīti pana dassanakiriyāya vippakatabhāvassa vuttattā ‘‘na ettāvatā bhikkhukiccaṃ pariyosita’’nti aññāsi, tasmā puna ‘‘kittāvatā panā’’ti pucchaṃ ārabhi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘passatīti vuttattā’’tiādi.
如实见:即见,以其殊胜义,故称无上。此见即是无上,故为见无上;或于诸见中最为无上,亦名见无上。此处所说世间智,当知即是观智。此智于一切世间智中最为殊胜,故称“无上”。于世间行道无上中,义理亦同。今为显了义,揭示此三种无上,故说“纯粹是出世间”等。虽一切出世间法皆具无上之性,然依最胜说,更无过上者,故以最上道智为见无上。因此说“阿拉汉道正见”。“其余道支”:指其余的阿拉汉道支,即已达究竟、导向涅槃的修行道支。“最上果之解脱”:即最上道的果解脱,谓阿拉汉果。“是诸漏尽者的”:即一切漏已尽断者。“涅槃之见”:即以最上道正见而得的现观。其中,“道支”即八道支。由于一切所知显示巴利原文
Yathābhūtaṃ passatīti dassanaṃ, visiṭṭhaṭṭhena anuttariyaṃ, dassanameva anuttariyanti dassanānuttariyaṃ, dassanesu vā anuttariyaṃ dassanānuttariyaṃ. Lokiyapaññāti cettha vipassanāpaññā veditabbā. Sā hi sabbalokiyapaññāhi visiṭṭhaṭṭhena ‘‘anuttarā’’ti vuttā. Lokiyapaṭipadānuttariyesupi eseva nayo. Idāni nippariyāyatova tividhampi anuttariyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘suddhalokuttaramevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Satipi sabbesampi lokuttaradhammānaṃ anuttarabhāve ukkaṭṭhaniddesena aggamaggapaññā tato uttaritarassa abhāvato dassanānuttariyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘arahattamaggasammādiṭṭhī’’ti. Sesāni maggaṅgānīti sesāni arahattamaggaṅgāni. Tāni hi matthakappattāni nibbānagāminī paṭipadāti. Aggaphalavimuttīti aggamaggassa phalavimutti arahattaphalaṃ. Khīṇāsavassāti sabbaso khīyamānāsavassa. Nibbānadassananti aggamaggasammādiṭṭhiyā sacchikiriyābhisamayamāha. Tattha maggaṅgānīti aṭṭha maggaṅgāni. Catusaccantogadhattā sabbassa ñeyyadhammassa ‘‘cattāri saccāni buddho’’ti vuttaṃ. Saccānugatasammohaviddhaṃsaneneva hi bhagavato sabbaso ñeyyāvaraṇappahānaṃ. Nibbisevanoti niruddhakilesavisevano.
362 有忍力:即具有不被摧毁的品性。无损害:即不散乱。全体:即无有缺欠。身之部分:是将身体本身称为“部分”;意指以身为体的部分,如头等肢体。同样,“好吧,善哉”这样的话语,只是话语的一部分,故称“语之部分”。显示巴利原文
362.Dhaṃsīti anuddhaṃsanasīlā. Anupahatanti avikkhittaṃ. Sakalanti anūnaṃ. Kāyaṅganti kāyameva aṅganti vadanti, kāyasaṅkhātaṃ aṅgaṃ sīsādiavayavanti attho. Tathā ‘‘hotu, sādhū’’ti evamidaṃ vācāya avayavo vācaṅganti.
363 「带来」,即运载而来。「福德」,是指称为福果的威力。由于有时省略后面的词,福果也被称为“福德”——如“诸比丘,因领受善法,此福德便如此增长”等语中所说。因此说「未来的果报蕴聚」。「福德之大地」,即广大福果的显现,如白伞、冠冕、拂尘等。因此说「正是果报蕴聚的随从」。我以离车族派遣来的嚼食与啖食供养了沙门乔达摩及其声闻僧团,因此这福德唯是离车族的。所以世尊说“愿它带给施主们安乐”。然而,对世尊及比丘僧团的施物实际上是由萨遮迦所供,而非离车族,所以世尊为使萨遮迦忆及此事,而说了“凡此”等语句。因此说“世尊如此”等语。「依尼干陀的看法而没有参与」,意思是不随萨遮迦的心意,而将此布施之物转入福田。因此说“将自己所供的布施……作了回向”。显示巴利原文
363.Āharantīti abhiharanti. Puññanti puññaphalasaṅkhāto ānubhāvo. Puññaphalampi hi uttarapadalopena ‘‘puñña’’nti vuccati – ‘‘kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.80). Tenāha ‘‘āyatiṃ vipākakkhandhā’’ti. Puññamahīti mahati puññaphalavibhūti setacchattamakuṭacāmarādi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vipākakkhandhānaṃyeva parivāro’’ti. Licchavīhi pesitena khādanīyabhojanīyena samaṇo gotamo sasāvakasaṅgho mayā parivisito, tasmā licchavīnameva taṃ puññaṃ hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ dāyakānaṃ sukhāya hotū’’ti. Yasmā pana bhagavato bhikkhusaṅghassa ca saccakena dānaṃ dinnaṃ, na licchavīhi, tasmā bhagavā saccakassa satiṃ parivattento ‘‘yaṃ kho’’tiādimāha. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘iti bhagavā’’tiādi. Nigaṇṭhassa matena vināyevāti saccakassa cittena vinā eva tassa dakkhiṇaṃ khettagataṃ katvā dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘attano dinnaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ…pe… niyyātesī’’ti.
6. 大萨遮迦经注疏显示巴利原文
6. Mahāsaccakasuttavaṇṇanā
364 「一时,世尊住毗舍离」——以此句,当时世尊在毗舍离的住所所限定的所有时间,即上午等各段时间,都被概括地含摄了;同样,“而于此时”这一句也是如此。而“上午时分”这一句,则是指其中的一个特定时段,即为乞食而省察的时候。然而,义注中说:“以这三句宣说的是同一个时段”,因为特殊已包含在普遍之中。由于洗面与先前尚未去世的这件事,在共相上相同,所以说“洗面已”。的确,洗脸后,若是以禅修为职责者,便观察时间,照常修习;若是以教理为职责者,则在若干次坐禅之后研习教理,随后持钵与衣,走向经行道。显示巴利原文
364.Ekaṃsamayaṃ bhagavā vesāliyaṃ viharatīti iminā tadā bhagavato vesāliyaṃ nivāsaparicchinno pubbaṇhādibhedo sabbo samayo sādhāraṇato gahito, tathā tena kho pana samayenāti ca iminā. Pubbaṇhasamayanti pana iminā tabbiseso, yo bhikkhācāratthāya paccavekkhaṇakālo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘tīhi padehi ekova samayo vutto’’ti vuttaṃ visesassa sāmaññantogadhattā. Mukhadhovanassa pubbakālakiriyābhāvasāmaññato vuttaṃ ‘‘mukhaṃ dhovitvā’’ti. Mukhaṃ dhovitvā eva hi vāsadhuro ce, velaṃ sallakkhetvā yathāciṇṇaṃ bhāvanānuyogaṃ, ganthadhuro ce, ganthaparicaye katipaye nisajjavāre anuyuñjitvā pattacīvaraṃ ādāya vitakkamāḷaṃ upagacchati.
意思是指:原因合适,即是相称。先前不问已想好的问题,反而去问别的,便如同不走正道,反从邪道绕行一般,所以称为「旁绕而行」。显示巴利原文
Kāraṇaṃ yuttaṃ, anucchavikanti attho. Pubbe yathācintitaṃ pañhaṃ apucchitvā aññaṃ pucchanto maggaṃ ṭhapetvā ummaggato parivattento viya hotīti āha ‘‘passena tāva pariharanto’’ti.
365 365.“‘大腿僵直’将会出现”——句中的“名为”一词是表惊异,故说“以惊异义而说”等。正如“盲人竟能登上山”等表述一样,由于与表惊异的词语相连,因此运用了未来时的“将会出现”。“身相随者”,即随逐于身体之物。通过“此身确有此法性、确有此存有性、确不可逾越如此”等语,观察身体的不净、无常等,这称为身修习,因此说“而身修习是指观”。将表示未来的词用在尚未存在的意义上,如此使用未来时是不合道理的;所说的意义也并不相符,即“大腿僵直将会出现”这句话所表达的含义。“此”,指自我折磨的修行实践。“他们的”,指尼干陀之徒。显示巴利原文
365.Ūrukkhambhopi nāma bhavissatīti ettha nāma-saddo vimhayatthoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘vimhayatthavasenā’’tiādi. ‘‘Andho nāma pabbataṃ abhiruhissatī’’tiādīsu viya vimhayavācīsaddayogena hi ‘‘bhavissatī’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ. Kāyanvayanti kāyānugataṃ. ‘‘Ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatīto’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.379; ma. ni. 1.112; ma. ni. 3.154) kāyassa asubhāniccāditāya anupassanā kāyabhāvanāti āha ‘‘kāyabhāvanāti pana vipassanā vuccatī’’ti. Anāgatarūpanti abhīte atthe anāgatasaddāropanaṃ anāgatappayogo na sameti. Atthopīti ‘‘ūrukkhambhopi nāma bhavissatī’’ti vuttaatthopi na sameti. Ayanti attakilamathānuyogo. Tesanti nigaṇṭhānaṃ.
366 366. 为了详细阐明自己所主张的身修习,广为开示,并依名姓分别那些修持此法之人,他便说了“难陀·瓦洽”等语。“有染污苦行者”,指那些通过苦行来染污身体的人。“已生脂肪”,指因进入肥胖状态而产生的脂肪。“舍弃前者”,即舍弃通过定时绝食、减食等方式减损、折磨身体的做法。“身修习亦不被了知”是一句确定之语:从究竟意义上说,即使是身修习,你以自慧尚且不能了知,于余处亦复不能得见。显示巴利原文
366. Attano adhippetakāyabhāvanaṃ vitthārento vitthārato dassento ye taṃ anuyuttā, te nāmagottato vibhāvento ‘‘nando vaccho’’tiādimāha. Kiliṭṭhatapānanti kāyassa kilesanatapānaṃ puggalānaṃ. Jātamedanti medabhāvāpattivasena uppannamedaṃ. Purimaṃ pahāyāti kālaparicchedena anāhāraappāhāratādivasena kāyassa apacinanaṃ khedanaṃ pariccajitvā. Kāyabhāvanāpana na paññāyatīti niyamaṃ paramatthato kāyabhāvanāpi tava ñāṇena na ñāyati, sesatopi na dissati.
367 367. “然而在此处”,即“阿耆毗舍那,你连身修习尚不知晓,又怎能了知心修习呢”这一句所在之处。同样,也特指“你连如此粗重、羸弱的身修习都无所知,又怎能了知微细、殊妙的心修习呢”这句释义的所在之处。“此语实非佛语”,意思是:相较于称为身修习的观而言,心修习是微细的;而观相较于作为其基础的禅那,则是粗重、羸弱的,这也正是该句的含义。长老说了“此言论恐非佛语”后,正欲起身离去。此时,大西瓦长老为了说明“这种观在初始阶段尚未被善加修习时,并非强有力、敏锐、明净,所以应以稚弱阶段来领会此义”,便引用了“诸比丘,可见”这段经文。在那段经文中,“执取”指结生。“舍弃”指死。“粗”,是相比于无色法,其状态粗劣,故称为粗。“身”,指由四大种所造、凝聚为一团的身聚。“粗地”,这是在此修习语境下的一种中性表述,意为以粗劣的方式。因此,才说“执取亦复如是,舍弃亦复如是”。显示巴利原文
367.Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāneti ‘‘kāyabhāvanampi kho tvaṃ, aggivessana, na aññāsi, kuto pana tvaṃ cittabhāvanaṃ jānissasī’’ti imasmiṃ ṭhāne. Tathā ‘‘yo tvaṃ evaṃ oḷārikaṃ dubbalaṃ kāyabhāvanaṃ na jānāsi, so tvaṃ kuto santasukhumaṃ cittabhāvanaṃ jānissasī’’ti etasmiṃ atthavaṇṇanāṭhāne. Abuddhavacanaṃ nāmetaṃ padanti kāyabhāvanāsaññitavipassanāto cittabhāvanā santā, vipassanā pana pādakajjhānato oḷārikā ceva dubbalā cāti ayañca etassa padassa attho. ‘‘Abuddhavacanaṃ nāmetaṃ vacanaṃ siyā’’ti vatvā thero pakkamituṃ ārabhati. Atha naṃ mahāsīvatthero ‘‘vipassanā nāmesā na ādito subrūhitā balavatī tikkhā visadā hoti, tasmā taruṇavasenāyamattho veditabbo’’ti dassento ‘‘dissati, bhikkhave’’ti suttapadaṃ (saṃ. ni. 2.62) āhari. Tattha ādānanti paṭisandhi. Nikkhepananti cuti. Oḷārikanti arūpadhammehi duṭṭhullabhāvattā oḷārikaṃ. Kāyanti catusantatirūpasamūhabhūtaṃ kāyaṃ. Oḷārikanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, oḷārikākārenāti attho. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘ādānampi nikkhepanampī’’ti.
368 “具有对乐的强贪”(sukhasārāgena samannāgato),指对乐受生起极为强烈的贪著之人。在《发趣论》中,正是以“未曾说”这一句加以遮止的。
“因此”(tasmā),即当乐受现前、安住于乐时,苦便不会生起。
“如此所说”(evaṃ vuttanti),即“由乐受之灭,而生起苦受”——此说并非指无间而生起。
“耗尽之后”(khepetvā),指耗尽善法之后。
“执取之后”(gaṇhitvā),指为自身取得处所。
“成为两方”(ubhatopakkhaṃ hutvā),即“时而是乐受,时而是苦受”,受便依这两方面的分派,次第地遍满、占据那些未修身者、未修心者的心。显示巴利原文
368.Sukhasārāgena samannāgatoti sukhavedanāya balavatararāgena samaṅgībhūto. Paṭṭhāne paṭisiddhā avacaneneva. Tasmāti sukhe ṭhite eva dukkhassānuppajjanato. Evaṃ vuttanti ‘‘sukhāya vedanāya nirodhā uppajjati dukkhā vedanā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ, na anantarāva uppajjanato. Khepetvāti kusalāni khepetvā. Gaṇhitvā attano eva okāsaṃ gahetvā. Ubhatopakkhaṃ hutvāti ‘‘kadāci sukhavedanā, kadāci dukkhavedanā’’ti pakkhadvayavasenapi vedanā cittassa pariyādāya hoti yathākkamaṃ abhāvitakāyassa abhāvitacittassa.
369 “观是乐的敌对者”(vipassanā ca sukhassa paccanīkā),意思是:一位以纯观为修行的初学者,在把握四大种的阶段,会阻止心向外游荡,唯于业处收摄正念。那时,他体验不到可意的身乐,犹如被关在拥挤牛栏中的牛群一般,感到苦恼、挣扎;而且由于所观之境极为贴近,身体中确实会生起痛苦。由此说观“与苦相近”。因此,世尊说了“已安立观”等语。
“在旅途中行走时”(addhāne gacchante gacchante),指在以把握四大等方式进行修习的期间。
“于彼彼处”(tattha tattha),即在此一处或彼一处身体部位上。
“苦已远离”,是因为以等至之力镇伏了苦,而那时尚未生起安止定。
“不少”(anappakaṃ),即广大(vipulaṃ)。
“乐”(sukhaṃ),指禅那之乐。
“渗透”(okkamatī),指由禅那所生的殊胜色法渗透进入色身;至于进入名身,则更不待言。
即便是修习身至念业处者,在安坐作意而修之初,也会生起身体的疲劳与内心的苦。显示巴利原文
369.Vipassanā ca sukhassa paccanīkāti sukkhavipassakassaādikammikassa mahābhūtapariggahādikāle bahi cittacāraṃ nisedhetvā kammaṭṭhāne eva satiṃ saṃharantassa aladdhassādaṃ kāyasukhaṃ na vindati, sambādhe vaje sanniruddho gogaṇo viya vihaññati vipphandati, accāsannahetukañca sarīre dukkhaṃ uppajjateva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhassa āsannā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā’’tiādi. Addhāne gacchante gacchanteti mahābhūtapariggahādivasena kāle gacchante. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sarīrapadese. Dukkhaṃ dūrāpagataṃ hoti samāpattibalena vikkhambhitattā appanābhāvato. Anappakaṃ vipulaṃ. Sukhanti jhānasukhaṃ . Okkamatīti jhānasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpavasena rūpakāyaṃ anupavisati, nāmakāyokkamane vattabbameva natthi. Kāyapassaddhikammikassapi sammasanabhāvanā paṭṭhapetvā nisinnassa kassaci āditova kāyakilamathacittupaghātāpi sambhavanti, samādhissa pana apaccanīkattā siniddhabhāvato ca na sukkhavipassanā viya sukhassa vipaccanīko, anukkamena ca dukkhaṃ vikkhambhetīti āha ‘‘yathā samādhī’’ti. Yathā samādhi, vipassanāya panetaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘na ca tathā vipassanā’’ti. Tena vuttanti yasmā vipassanā sukhassa paccanīkā, sā ca kāyabhāvanā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘uppannāpi sukhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā kāyassā’’ti. Tathā yasmā samādhi dukkhassa paccanīko, so ca cittabhāvanā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘uppannāpi dukkhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā cittassā’’ti yojanā.
370 “撞击功德”(guṇe ghaṭṭetvā),意思是不假任何借口,径直带到面前。连贯起来解释为:所谓“已生的乐受将遍取、占据我的心而安住”——这样的情况根本不存在。显示巴利原文
370.Guṇe ghaṭṭetvāti apadesena vinā samīpameva netvā. Taṃ vata mama cittaṃ uppannā sukhā vedanā pariyādāya ṭhassatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti yojanā.
371 “怎么不会呢?”意思是:乐受和苦受都会依照各自的缘而生起啊。“那个意义”(tamatthaṃ),即当乐受与苦受生起时,自心不被其所制服的意义。在此,先于《帕萨拉西亚经》中提到菩提树下金刚座上的端坐:“就在那里坐下”;后于《大萨遮迦经》中提到在苦行处修苦行时的端坐:“就在那里坐下”。显示巴利原文
371.Kiṃ na bhavissati, sukhāpi dukkhāpi vedanā yathāpaccayaṃ uppajjatevāti attho. Tamatthanti sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ uppattiyā attano cittassa anabhibhavanīyatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ. Tattha tāva pāsarāsisutte bodhipallaṅke nisajjā ‘‘tattheva nisīdi’’nti vuttā. Idha mahāsaccakasutte dukkarakārikāya dukkaracaraṇe nisajjā ‘‘tattheva nisīdi’’nti vuttā.
374 “以欲造作”:即依渴爱的方式,这是它的意思。“以湿润造作”:即依润泽的方式。“以迷醉造作”:即依迷惑的方式,由放逸所引起。“以强烈渴望造作”:即依欲求显现的方式。“以持续燃烧”:即依贪欲之火持续燃烧的方式。由于此处意在出离轮回,这些词实际上都是出世间道的同义语。显示巴利原文
374.Chandakaraṇavasenāti taṇhāyanavasenāti attho. Sinehakaraṇavasenāti sinehanavasena. Mucchākaraṇavasenāti mohanavasena pamādāpādanena. Vipāsākaraṇavasenāti pātukamyatāvasena. Anudahanavasenāti rāgagginā anudahanavasena. Lokuttaramaggavevacanameva vaṭṭanissaraṇassa adhippetattā.
“执取湿”表示烦恼未断除的状态;“执取有湿润”表示未被镇伏的状态;“投入水中后的状态”表示烦恼现行存在的情况;“优昙跋罗木”表示有身的无坚实性。“即以此方式”:指按照前文所说“湿的优昙跋罗木”等方式。“连同妻儿的出家”:应知是指与妻儿一起进行的游方者出家。婆罗门出家有住棚者、多水者、天鹅、胜天鹅等类别。显示巴利原文
Allaggahaṇena kilesānaṃ asamucchinnabhāvaṃ dasseti, sasnehaggahaṇena avikkhambhitabhāvaṃ, udake pakkhittabhāvaggahaṇena samudācārāvatthaṃ, udumbarakaṭṭhaggahaṇena attabhāvassa asārakattaṃ. Imināva nayenāti ‘‘allaṃ udumbarakaṭṭha’’ntiādinā vuttanayena. Saputtabhariyapabbajjāyāti puttabhariyehi saddhiṃ kataparibbājakapabbajjāvasena veditabbā. Kuṭīcakabahūdakahaṃsa-paramahaṃsādibhedā brāhmaṇapabbajjā.
376 “无湿润木”:因为从任何方面都没有水的润泽,所以称为无湿润木。由此说“断绝湿润,无水”。或者,koḷa指干枯的朽木,处于朽木的状态,即是“无湿润木”。修行者之所以依凭大精进,是由于其本性未被烦恼征服,且不为对治法的修习所浸染。这样便显示了干枯无湿润木的性质,以及远离水源、置于陆地的状况。“精勤所致的”:指由严厉调伏烦恼的精进所引生的。“受”:指行道之受,此处指的是苦行道。显示巴利原文
376. Kutopi imassa āposineho natthīti koḷāpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘chinnasinehaṃ nirāpa’’nti. Koḷanti vā sukkhakaliṅgaraṃ vuccati, koḷaṃ koḷabhāvaṃ āpannanti koḷāpaṃ. Paṭipannassa upakkamamahattanissitatā pakatiyā kilesehi anabhibhūtatāya. Atintatā paṭipakkhabhāvanāya. Tathā hi sukkhakoḷāpabhāvo, ārakā udakā thale nikkhittabhāvo ca nidassito. Opakkamikāhīti kilesaatiniggaṇhanupakkamappabhavāhi. Vedanāhīti paṭipattivedanāhi. Dukkhā paṭipadā hi idhādhippetā.
377 那么,难道他没有能力吗?正因为如此,他行了六年他人即使想象也难以企及的难行苦行——这才是此处的意趣。其实,无论行或不行,他都有能力,因为成佛的因缘已经成就。正如一切菩萨在最后有身中,依于法性,至少七日必定有苦行;同样,世尊虽有行苦行的能力,也确实行了,但他并不因此而成佛,而是依于中道。这样说,是为了遮止苦行,显示它并非含摄天神世间而证得菩提的正道;而这位世尊的六年苦行,实由业报所致。正如所说:显示巴利原文
377.Kiṃ pana na samattho, yato evaṃ parehi cintitumpi asakkuṇeyyaṃ dukkaracariyaṃ chabbassāni akāsīti adhippāyo. Katvāpi akatvāpi samatthova kāraṇassa nipphannattā. ‘‘Yathāpi sabbesampi kho bodhisattānaṃ carimabhave antamaso sattāhamattampi dhammatāvasena dukkaracariyā hotiyeva, evaṃ bhagavā samattho dukkaracariyaṃ kātuṃ, evañca naṃ akāsi, na pana tāya buddho jāto, atha kho majjhimāya eva paṭipattiyā’’ti tassā byatirekamukhena sadevakassa lokassa bodhāya amaggabhāvadīpanatthaṃ, imassa pana bhagavato kammavipākavasena chabbassāni dukkaracariyā ahosi. Vuttañhetaṃ –
那时,我乔帝巴喇对迦叶善逝说:
剃除头发的人,如何能得菩提?菩提最为难得。
以此业报,我历经众多苦行;
于优楼频螺六年,而后证得菩提。
我并非以此道证得无上菩提;
我以邪道寻求,却为宿业所阻碍。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Avacāhaṃ jotipālo, kassapaṃ sugataṃ tadā; Kuto nu bodhi muṇḍassa, bodhi paramadullabhā. Tena kammavipākena, acariṃ dukkaraṃ bahuṃ; Chabbassānuruvelāyaṃ, tato bodhimapāpuṇiṃ. Nāhaṃ etena maggena, pāpuṇiṃ bodhimuttamaṃ; Kumaggena gavesissaṃ, pubbakammena vārito’’ti.
有些人认为,他修苦行是为了显示苦行并非觉悟之道;也有人说,世间主修苦行是为了展示自身精进成就的圆满。由于他志向高尚已达极致,与誓愿相应的正觉有着极强的欲求和圆满成就,他心想:“这将是我日后喜悦的源泉”,为了向世间显示自己精进的威力,世间主便修习苦行。因此他说“含天神的世界……”等。这里,“精进锤炼的功德”是指让精进增长的成就功德。为了用比喻阐明上述含义,故说“在宫殿”等。“战斗中有二、三次打击”,是指对敌军进行两三次打击。“策励精进”指与正勤相应的修习精进,或指一切前行精进。显示巴利原文
Dukkaracariyāya bodhāya amaggabhāvadassanatthaṃ dukkaracariyaṃ akāsīti keci. Atha vā lokanāthassa attano parakkamasampattidassanatthāya dukkaracariyā. Paṇītādhimuttiyā hi paramukkaṃsagatabhāvato abhinīhārānurūpaṃ sambodhiyaṃ tibbachandatāya sikhāppattiyā tadatthaṃ īdisampi nāma dukkaracariyaṃ akāsīti loke attano vīriyānubhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ – ‘‘so ca me pacchā pītisomanassāvaho bhavissatī’’ti lokanātho dukkaracariyaṃ akāsi. Tenāha ‘‘sadevakassa lokassā’’tiādi. Tattha vīriyanimmathanaguṇoti vīriyassa saṃvaḍḍhanasampādanaguṇo. Yathāvuttamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘pāsāde’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṅgāme dve tayo sampahāreti dvikkhattuṃ tikkhattuṃ vā parasenāya pahārapayoge. Padhānavīriyanti sammappadhānehi āsevanavīriyaṃ, sabbaṃ vā pubbabhāgavīriyaṃ.
“上齿”指具有压倒性的牙齿,即位于上方的牙齿,因此他说“上齿”。因为上齿就如杵与臼的关系,在咀嚼时特别能压倒对方而发挥作用。“以善心”指由强有力的正思惟所等起的善心。“不善心”指与欲寻等相应的心。不给不善心生起的机会,便是抑制。以逐一遮破的方式驱除,名为“遮破”。以精进的热恼来镇伏,名为“烧燎”。“有忧劳”即伴随烦恼热。“以精勤”即通过引生身体疲劳的精进力。“被刺”即被刺痛。“有念”指在念住之时。显示巴利原文
Abhidantanti abhibhavanadantaṃ, uparidantanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘uparidanta’’nti. So hi itaraṃ musalaṃ viya udukkhalaṃ visesato kassaci khādanakāle abhibhuyya vattati. Kusalacittenāti balavasammāsaṅkappayuttena kusalacittena. Akusalacittanti kāmavitakkādisahitaṃ akusalacittaṃ. Akusalacittassa pavattituṃ appadānaṃ niggaho. Taṃtaṃpaṭikkhepavasena vinodanaṃ abhinippīḷanaṃ. Vīriyatāpena vikkhambhanaṃ abhisantāpanaṃ. Sadarathoti sapariḷāho. Padhānenāti padahanena, kāyassa kilamathuppādakena vīriyenāti attho. Viddhassāti tudassa. Satoti samānassa.
378 “缠头”指用绳子绑住头部,再以木棍卷绕缠紧。说“阿拉汉”是这样的,以此表明:“即使变得如此昏迷,也依然安住。”因此他说“如同死尸一般”,意思是就像死尸一样没有感受。“从梦的领受开始”,即从结生时梦见白象并由婆罗门解梦那时开始。显示巴利原文
378.Sīsaveṭhananti sīsaṃ rajjuyā bandhitvā daṇḍakena parivattakaveṭhanaṃ. Arahanto nāma evarūpā hontīti iminā yathāyaṃ, evaṃ visaññībhūtāpi hutvā viharantīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘matakasadisā’’ti, vedanāppattā viya hontīti attho. Supinappaṭiggahaṇato paṭṭhāyāti paṭisandhiggahaṇe setavāraṇasupinaṃ passitvā brāhmaṇehi byākatakālato paṭṭhāya.
379 由于法身健康,所以说“善哉,堪忍受者”即是“尊者”,这是表示亲切的称呼。因此他说“深切喜爱……”等。“不食”指这样地不吃,这里将音“bh”替换为“j”,故说“非食物”。“你们不要这样”,即“不要像你们所说的‘将从毛孔吞入,将纳入’那样去做。”为什么?“我将维生”,即我将适量地进食以维持生命,如此受用食物。显示巴利原文
379. Dhammasarīrassa arogabhāvena sādhūti marisaniyoti māriso, piyāyanavacanametaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sampiyāyamānā’’tiādi. Ajajjitanti evaṃ abhuñjitaṃ bhakārassa jakārādesaṃ katvā. Tenāha ‘‘abhojana’’nti. Evaṃ mā karitthāti ‘‘lomakūpehi ajjhohāressāma anuppavesessāmā’’ti yathā tumhehi vuttaṃ, evaṃ mā karittha. Kasmā? Yāpessāmahanti ahañca yāvadatthaṃ āhāramattaṃ bhuñjanto yathā yāpessāmi, evaṃ āhāraṃ paṭisevissāmi.
380-81 “仅此为最”指如此便是最上,其义为:无有比此更强烈的精勤所生之苦受。所谓“少一”,是就除国王应取之犁外的其他犁而言。那件犁以黄金装饰,其余则以白银装饰,因此他说“大臣们,少一的八百银犁”。在阿罗罗陀迦罗摩会合处所得的禅那为轮回之因,而入出息定则是身至念所摄,且为一切菩萨修习观的起因,故称“正觉之道”。“为觉悟”即为证四圣谛,或为遍知一切所应知法。“随念之识”即随念相应之识。为显示此识随顺何人之念,故有“非此……”等语。显示巴利原文
380-81.Etāva paramanti ettakaṃ paramaṃ, na ito paraṃ opakkamikadukkhavedanāvediyanaṃ atthīti attho. Rañño gahetabbanaṅgalato aññāni sandhāya ‘‘ekena ūna’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ suvaṇṇaparikkhataṃ, itarāni rajataparikkhatāni. Tenāha ‘‘amaccā ekenūnaaṭṭhasatarajatanaṅgalānī’’ti. Āḷārudakasamāgame laddhajjhānāni vaṭṭapādakāni, ānāpānasamādhi pana kāyagatāsatipariyāpannattā sabbesañca bodhisattānaṃ vipassanāpādakattā ‘‘bodhāya maggo’’ti vutto. Bujjhanatthāyāti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ, sabbasseva vā ñeyyadhammassa abhisambujjhanāya . Satiyā anussaraṇakaviññāṇaṃ satānusāriviññāṇaṃ. Kassā pana satiyāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nayida’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
382 “已配置的”指通过履行各种义务而被安置的侍者,因此他说“叶屋……”等。“食利养丰多者”指趋向于利养丰裕的人。“返转”指先前为断除对利养的贪著而修行,今则从此逆转,因此他说“味贪……乃至……返转了”。“以法决定性”,即就法的自然性而言。为了说明该自然性,他说“菩萨的……”等。他们只前往波罗奈,并就在那里——一切诸佛皆不舍弃的转法轮处。据说五群比丘于卫塞月底的后半月离去。因此他说“当他们离去后,菩萨得到了半个月的身远离”。显示巴利原文
382.Paccupaṭṭhitāti taṃtaṃvattakaraṇavasena patiupaṭṭhitā upaṭṭhāyakā. Tenāha ‘‘paṇṇasālā’’tiādi. Paccayabāhullikoti paccayānaṃ bāhullāya paṭipanno. Āvattoti pubbe paccayagedhappahānāya paṭipanno, idāni tato paṭinivatto. Tenāha ‘‘rasagiddho…pe… āvatto’’ti. Dhammaniyāmenāti dhammatāya. Tameva dhammataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bodhisattassā’’tiādimāha. Bārāṇasimeva tatthāpi ca sabbabuddhānaṃ avijahitadhammacakkapavattanaṭṭhānameva agamaṃsu. Pañcavaggiyā kira visākhamāsassa addhamāsiyaṃ gatā. Tenāha ‘‘tesu gatesu aḍḍhamāsaṃ kāyavivekaṃ labhitvā’’ti.
387 针对“的确,乔达摩的弟子们专修心之修习而住,不修身之修习”这一句,故说“问了一个问题”。这段法教即“我实证了……”等开示。“不粘著”:由于贪欲与邪见的烦恼已彻底断除,故完全不为其所染。“无污染”是它的同义词,指没有渴爱之喜贪的染著。所谓“唯所行之内”,即指称为“所行之内”的果等至之所缘,亦即涅槃。关于巴利经文中“先前之定相”而言,他说“我令沉入”,意思是依果等至定力,以极善安置的方式令心正确地沉入其中。“由先作意”指入定前已生起的策励作意。“确定了”指限定入定的时刻。因此他接着说“随喜赞叹之词……从未间断”。为了说明佛陀如此限定时间入定、如所限时间出定而毫无勉强,因为他的自在力已完全善巧纯熟,故说“因为诸佛……”等。对于领受法者,在呼吸的间歇之处,若对当时所开示的法不能完全领会,那一刹那的教导便可能落空。然而,诸佛绝不会有任何无意义的举动。显示巴利原文
387. ‘‘Addhābhoto gotamassa sāvakācittabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti, no kāyabhāvana’’nti imaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi’’nti. Imaṃ dhammadesananti ‘‘abhijānāmi kho panāha’’ntiādikaṃ dhammadesanaṃ. Asallīno taṇhādiṭṭhikilesānaṃ samucchinnattā tehi sabbaso na litto. Anupalittoti tasseva vevacanaṃ taṇhānandiyā abhāvena. Gocarajjhattamevāti gocarajjhattasaññite phalasamāpattiyā ārammaṇe, nibbāneti attho. Yaṃ sandhāya pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘purimasmiṃ samādhinimitte’’ti vuttaṃ sannisīdāpemīti phalasamāpattisamādhinā accantasamādānavasena cittaṃ sammadeva nisīdāpemi. Pubbābhogenāti samāpajjanato pubbe pavattaābhogena. Paricchinditvāti samāpajjanakkhaṇaṃ paricchinditvā. Tenāha ‘‘sādhukāra…pe… avicchinneyevā’’ti. Evamassa paricchinnakālasamāpajjanaṃ yathāparicchinnakālaṃ vuṭṭhānañca buddhānaṃ na bhāriyaṃ vasībhāvassa tathāsuppaguṇabhāvatoti dassento āha ‘‘buddhānaṃ hī’’tiādi. Dhammasampaṭiggāhakānaṃ assāsavāre vā. Tadā hi desiyamānaṃ dhammaṃ upadhāretuṃ na sakkonti, tasmā tasmiṃ khaṇe desitadesanā niratthakā siyā. Na hi buddhānaṃ niratthakā kiriyā atthi.
“这令人信受之事”:指听到这样极为稀有的事迹后,心想这样的修行唯有正自觉者才能做到,于是以责怪的口吻说话,并非出于本性。因此他说“连对大师的丝毫净信也没有生起”。“身疲劳”指由于特殊条件而产生的色身劳累状态。“执受”指与根相连的物质,“非执受”指不与根相连的物质。因阳光照射而绽放,因没有阳光而含苞。某些树如亭提尼迦树等,都因所依色法的不显现而收拢。依于非色法的特性,五识及唯作识的不生起,即所谓的不显现,在此被定义为睡眠。因此他说“由于疲劳之故,这里将有分流的中断作为睡眠来理解”。这里的“由于疲劳之故”是简别:单是由于疲劳,而不是由于昏眠心所。这是需要指出的区别及其结果。他是指身体疲劳,即由身体病患所导致的睡眠而如此说的。但“世尊没有身体病患”是说不通的,因为经典中有“我背部感到疼痛”的话。关于“迷惑之住”,是转述处格,他说“称为迷惑之住”,或者指属于迷惑之住范畴的所谓白天昏睡,以此连接。显示巴利原文
Okappanīyametanti ‘‘tassā eva kathāyā’’tiādinā vuttaṃ ativiya acchariyagataṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ sutvā īdisī paṭipatti sammāsambuddhasseva hotīti upavādavasena vadati, na sabhāvena. Tenāha ‘‘satthari pasādamattampi na uppanna’’nti. Kāyadarathoti paccayavisesavasena rūpakāyassa parissamākāro. Upādinnaketi indriyabaddhe. Anupādinnaketi anindriyabaddhe. Vikasanti sūriyarasmisamphassena. Tadabhāvena makulāni honti. Kesañci tintinikādirukkhānaṃ . Patilīyanti nissayarūpadhammaavipphārikatāya. Arūpadhammatāya pañcaviññāṇānañceva kiriyāmayaviññāṇānañca appavattisaññitā avipphārikatā hoti, yattha niddāsamaññā. Tenāha ‘‘darathavasena bhavaṅgasotañca idha niddāti adhippeta’’nti. Tattha darathavasenāti darathavaseneva, na thinamiddhavasenāti avadhāraṇaṃ avadhāraṇaphalañca niddhāretabbaṃ. Taṃ sandhāyāti kāyassa darathasaṅkhātasarīragilānahetukaṃ niddaṃ sandhāya. Sarīragilānañca bhagavato natthīti na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘piṭṭhi me āgilāyatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.300; ma. ni. 2.22; cūḷava. 345) vacanato. Sammohavihārasminti paccatte etaṃ bhummavacananti āha ‘‘sammohavihāroti vadantī’’ti, sammohavihārasmiṃ vā pariyāpannaṃ etaṃ vadanti, yadidaṃ divā niddokkamananti yojanā.
389 “引向”指被引入过失之道、应受谴责之途。“欢喜”指满心欢喜。因此他说“以心接受”。“随喜”指口中称赞教法“善哉,善哉”。因此他说“也以言语称赞”。“在适宜的时机”即到了适合出家的时机。显示巴利原文
389.Upanītehīti dosamaggaṃ nindāpathaṃ upanītehi. Abhinanditvāti sampiyāyitvā. Tenāha ‘‘cittena sampaṭicchanto’’ti. Anumoditvāti ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti desanāya thomanavasena anumoditvā. Tenāha ‘‘vācāyapi pasaṃsanto’’ti. Sampatte kāleti pabbajjāyogge kāle anuppatte.
“驱散僧团”即将僧团遣离,断除僧团的障碍。“戏论”指残余的烦恼。为了详细解释“有福者受国王尊敬”这句话,所以说“因为在那时……”等。随己意举行布萨羯磨。显示巴利原文
Gaṇaṃ vinodetvāti gaṇaṃ apanetvā gaṇapalibodhaṃ chinditvā. Papañcanti avasesakilesaṃ. ‘‘Puññavā rājapūjito’’ti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tasmiñhi kāle’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Chandavāsaharaṇena uposathakammaṃ karonto.
因整夜唯说佛陀功德,长老为彰显自己的智慧与说法之广博,便问:“尊者,佛陀功德仅此而已吗?”意谓:“依您无余开演的法语,佛陀功德似已说尽;实则它们无量无边,此外更有余者乎?”他如此说,是为令长老于彼处作狮子吼。因国王的国土有限,而前所说之善说法又是无价之宝,故他说:“这是我微薄、鄙陋的供养。”而“百由旬”乃依周界计算,且仅就人类受用范围而言。显示巴利原文
Sakalaṃ rattiṃ buddhaguṇānaṃyeva kathitattā therassa ñāṇaṃ desanāvibhavañca vibhāvento āha ‘‘ettakāva, bhante, buddhaguṇā’’ti. Imāya, bhante, tumhākaṃ dhammakathāya anavasesato buddhaguṇā kathitā viya jāyanti, evaṃ santepi anantāparimeyyāva te, kiṃ ito parepi vijjantevāti theraṃ tattha sīhanādaṃ nadāpetukāmo āha ‘‘udāhu aññepi atthī’’tiādi. Rajjassa padesikattā, yathāvuttasubhāsitassa ca anagghattā vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me duggatapaṇṇākāro’’ti. Tiyojanasatikanti idaṃ parikkhepavasena vuttaṃ, tañca kho manussānaṃ paribhogavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
7. 《小爱尽经》注疏显示巴利原文
7. Cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā
390 “在那里”(Tatrā):于阐明东园鹿母讲堂之义时,今将叙述此次第解说。“诸宝珠”(Maṇīnaṃ)中,因意指红莲宝珠,故说“以及其他”。由此应知含摄因陀罗尼罗等宝珠。依青、黄、赤、白、淡红、光耀、杂色七种颜色而说。显示巴利原文
390.Tatrāti tasmiṃ pubbārāmamigāramātupāsādānaṃ atthavibhāvane ayaṃ idāni vuccamānā anupubbī kathā. Maṇīnanti ettha padumarāgamaṇīnaṃ adhippetattā āha ‘‘aññehi cā’’ti. Tena indanīlādimaṇīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassarakabaravaṇṇavasena sattavaṇṇehi.
诸渴爱于此彻底灭尽,故称“渴爱灭尽”(增支部注3.7.61),就彼而言。而“渴爱灭尽”是就所缘说为依格,故说“以彼为所缘后”。心解脱性,即从一切杂染中得心解脱。所谓后分行道,即圣谛现观,此为教法行者的行境,应各自证知,故说“他问:请简要开示前分行道”。因不动法性,超越坏灭、衰败而得名边际,故为究竟;彼自身因无退失之自性,故其究竟即为终极,即此有究竟终极。因此说“义为决定究竟、恒常究竟”。因已证悟的出世间法,其见绝无退失动摇。究竟地由四轭得安稳者有此,故称究竟轭安稳者。因道梵行已住立,且彼有不可退失之自性,故为究竟梵行者。因此说“义为常梵行者”。终结,即梵行之终结。显示巴利原文
Taṇhā sabbaso khīyanti etthāti taṇhāsaṅkhayo (a. ni. ṭī. 3.7.61), tasmiṃ. Taṇhāsaṅkhayeti ca visaye idaṃ bhummanti āha ‘‘taṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’ti. Vimuttacittatāyāti sabbasaṃkilesehi vimuttacittatāya. Aparabhāgapaṭipadā nāma ariyasaccābhisamayo, sā sāsanacārigocarā paccattaṃ veditabbatoti āha ‘‘pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ saṃkhittena desethāti pucchatī’’ti. Akuppadhammatāya khayavayasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ atītāti accantā, so eva aparihānasabhāvattā accantā niṭṭhā etassāti accantaniṭṭho. Tenāha ‘‘ekantaniṭṭho satataniṭṭhoti attho’’ti. Na hi paṭividdhassa lokuttaradhammassa dassanaṃ kuppanaṃ nāma atthi. Accantameva catūhi yogehi khemo etassa atthīti accantayogakkhemī. Maggabrahmacariyassa vusitattā, tassa ca aparihānasabhāvattā accantaṃ brahmacārīti accantabrahmacārī. Tenāha ‘‘niccabrahmacārīti attho’’ti. Pariyosānanti brahmacariyassa pariyosānaṃ.
“速行”意为急行。“善察”意为思惟,即依随自己曾听闻的教导,随念、确定导师的教法。“不先领解后”意为不以义理决择的方式先行领解。系于六门者,就是六门者,即由他们。显示巴利原文
Vegāyatīti turitāyati. Sallakkhesīti cintesi, attanā yathā sutāya satthu desanāya anussaraṇavasena upadhāresi. Anuggaṇhitvāvāti atthavinicchayavasena anuggahetvā eva. Chasu dvāresu niyuttāti chadvārikā, tehi.
五蕴即五取蕴。此处是就自身全体而言说“一切法”,因为意指观照的所缘范围,因此处、界也应视为归属于彼。故世尊说“不适合于执取”。不适合于执取,即不适合于“这是我的,这是我的我”的耽著。如同“足以厌离、足以离染”等(长部2.272;相应部2.124-125,128,134,143)中,alaṃ一词也有“适合”义,故说“不适合”。“成就”即存在。虽然第三、第四这两种清净是证智,但由于彼有具缘的名色见,且在把握缘时,因名色具缘,三相极为明显,故说“以知遍知而证知无常、苦、无我”。同样,以度遍知,由此将“以无常等性不适合于执取”归结于名色,而非归结于证智的资粮法。因为前者从义理上已得三相,以自相确定为其作用;后者则从自性上将三相加于彼而作思惟。由于仅一心刹那、仅一现起,故为极少。为显示色把握的粗显性而说非色把握。在显示时,因受的邻近性,特别是对乐味的贪著,以及心耽著于有味的缘故,以受为缘而令生起后显示。显示巴利原文
Pañcakkhandhāti pañcupādānakkhandhā. Sakkāyasabbañhi sandhāya idha ‘‘sabbe dhammā’’ti vuttaṃ vipassanāvisayassa adhippetattā, tasmā āyatanadhātuyopi taggatikā eva daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘nālaṃ abhinivesāyā’’ti. Na yuttā abhinivesāya ‘‘etaṃ mama, eso me attā’’ti ajjhosānāya. ‘‘Alameva nibbindituṃ alaṃ virajjitu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.272; saṃ. ni. 2.124-125, 128, 134, 143) viya alaṃ-saddo yuttatthopi hotīti āha ‘‘na yuttā’’ti. Sampajjantīti bhavanti. Yadipi ‘‘tatiyā, catutthī’’ti idaṃ visuddhidvayaṃ abhiññāpaññā, tassā pana sappaccayanāmarūpadassanabhāvato, sati ca paccayapariggahe sappaccayattā (nāmarūpassa aniccatā, aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ, dukkhañca anattāti atthato) lakkhaṇattayaṃ supākaṭameva hotīti āha ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti ñātapariññāya abhijānātī’’ti. Tatheva tīraṇapariññāyāti iminā aniccādibhāvena nālaṃ abhinivesāyāti nāmarūpassa upasaṃharati, na abhiññāpaññānaṃ sambhāradhammānaṃ. Purimāya hi atthato āpannalakkhaṇattayaṃ gaṇhāti salakkhaṇasallakkhaṇaparattā tassā, dutiyāya sarūpato tassā lakkhaṇattayāropanavasena sammasanabhāvato. Ekacittakkhaṇikatāya abhinipātamattatāya ca appamattakampi. Rūpapariggahassa oḷārikabhāvato arūpapariggahaṃ dasseti. Dassento ca vedanāya āsannabhāvato, visesato sukhasārāgitāya, bhavassādagadhitamānasatāya ca sakkassa vedanāvasena nibbattetvā dasseti.
以生灭之义,即以生灭为自性,生起后坏灭。无常,即非恒常。无常相即无常性、生灭性。因此,因为观五蕴的坏灭、衰灭之智为无常随观,具足彼者即无常随观者,故。坏灭离染,即称为坏灭的离染,是诸行的坏灭。缘彼而彻底离诸行染者,彼涅槃为究竟离染。于灭随观者中,即于灭随观之句。说“此即理趣”后,以一分显示彼而说“灭亦有……两种”。为显示“于一切漏防护中所说的舍离,此处即说为舍离”,而说“舍离即谓舍遣”等。遍舍舍遣是观。以跃入而专注故,跃入舍遣是道,因为其他无彼故。彼是道。以所缘故,即以成就作用而作所缘故。如是,道以外的其他涅槃所缘无跃入舍遣,此义得成。以遍舍与跃入,即以此二因。一切蕴的舍遣,应视为以断除彼所系属的杂染。心跃入,是就与道相应的心而说。此二者都是舍遣。具足彼二者,即具足观者与具足道者。如“以无常随观断除常想”等语(无碍解道1.52),正如由观而得烦恼的遍舍舍离,同样,未来由他们烦恼所应生的诸蕴的遍舍舍离也应说;而跃入舍离,则应由在道中所得、为决定因的出起随顺观而了知;但在道中,此二者皆属智所行,以非权说而得故。因此说“具足彼二者之人”等。显示巴利原文
Uppādavayaṭṭhenāti udayabbayasabhāvena uppajjitvā nirujjhanena. Aniccāti addhu vā. Aniccalakkhaṇaṃ aniccatā udayavayatā. Tasmāti yasmā pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ khayato vayato dassanañāṇaṃ aniccānupassanā, taṃsamaṅgī ca puggalo aniccānupassī , tasmā. Khayavirāgoti khayasaṅkhāto virāgo saṅkhārānaṃ palujjanā. Yaṃ āgamma sabbaso saṅkhārehi virajjanā hoti, taṃ nibbānaṃ accantavirāgo. Nirodhānupassimhipīti nirodhānupassipadepi. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti abhidisitvā taṃ ekadesena vivaranto ‘‘nirodhopi hi…pe… duvidhoyevā’’ti āha. Sabbāsavasaṃvare vuttavossaggova idha ‘‘paṭinissaggo’’ti vuttoti dassento ‘‘paṭinissaggo vuccati vossaggo’’tiādimāha. Pariccāgavossaggo vipassanā. Pakkhandanavasena appanato pakkhandanavossaggo maggo aññassa tadabhāvato. Soti maggo. Ārammaṇatoti kiccasādhanavasena ārammaṇakaraṇato. Evañhi maggato aññesaṃ nibbānārammaṇānaṃ pakkhandanavossaggābhāvo siddho hoti. Pariccajanena pakkhandanena cāti dvīhipi vā kāraṇehi. Sabbesaṃ khandhānaṃ vossajjanaṃ tappaṭibaddhasaṃkilesappahānena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cittaṃ pakkhandatīti maggasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ sandhāyāha. Ubhayampetaṃ vossajjanaṃ. Tadubhayasamaṅgīti vipassanāsamaṅgī maggasamaṅgī ca. ‘‘Aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ pajahatī’’tiādivacanato (paṭi. ma. 1.52) yathā vipassanāya kilesānaṃ pariccāgapaṭinissaggo labbhati, evaṃ āyatiṃ tehi kilesehi uppādetabbakhandhānampi pariccāgapaṭinissaggo vattabbo, pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo pana magge labbhamānāya ekantakāraṇabhūtāya vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāya vasena veditabbo, magge pana tadubhayampi ñāyāgatameva nippariyāyatova labbhamānattā. Tenāha ‘‘tadubhayasamaṅgī puggalo’’tiādi.
随问者的意乐,于“于世中无所执取”一句中,是以欲取遮止执取,故说“以渴爱而不执取”。若不以渴爱执取,则依见的执取便无有安立处,因此唯说“以渴爱”。不执著,即是不取;或者,以见执著而言,不如说“常”等那般而执取。简要速说,即随其意乐,不作戏论而说。显示巴利原文
Pucchantassa ajjhāsayavasena ‘‘na kiñci loke upādiyatī’’ti ettha kāmupādānavasena upādiyanaṃ paṭikkhipīyatīti āha ‘‘taṇhāvasena na upādiyatī’’ti. Taṇhāvasena vā asati upādiyane diṭṭhivasena upādiyanaṃ anavakāsamevāti ‘‘taṇhāvasena’’icceva vuttaṃ. Na parāmasatīti nādiyati, diṭṭhiparāmāsavasena vā ‘‘nicca’’ntiādinā na parāmasati. Saṃkhitteneva khippaṃ kathesīti tassa ajjhāsayavasena papañcaṃ akatvā kathesi.
391 “正面通达”:以向所缘之智,正面通达所知的对象,如实了知。因此说“了知后”。“依随众而令解了”:即不论大会众或小会众,皆随其根机、恰如其分地令其解了法义。“不超出范围”:即不流散、不进行。“不要无意义地前往”:这是依法性而说,并非依于导师的内心倾向。因为这是导师语声的八种特质之一,即“随众有范围”。“有缝隙、有开口之处”:即连成为缝隙、成为开口的余地也不存在,这正是前面所说的世尊音声之所以传承下来的原因。“因此”:即依于上述原因。显示巴利原文
391.Abhisamāgantvāti abhimukhañāṇena ñeyyaṃ samāgantvā yāthāvato viditvā. Tenāha ‘‘jānitvā’’ti. Yathāparisaviññāpakattāti yathāparisaṃ dhammasampaṭiggāhikāya mahatiyā, appakāya vā parisāya anurūpameva viññāpanato. Pariyantaṃ na niccharatīti na pavattati. Mā niratthakā agamāsīti idaṃ dhammatāvasena vuttaṃ, na satthu ajjhāsayavasena. Ekañhetaṃ satthu vacīghosassa aṭṭhasu aṅgesu, yadidaṃ parisapariyantatā. Chiddavivarokāsoti chiddabhūto, vivarabhūto vā okāsopi natthi, bhagavato saddāsavanakāraṇaṃ vuttameva. Tasmāti yathāvuttakāraṇato.
“具有五支”:即具有五个部分,五支本身就是“五支的”。大鼓等乐器也是属于“皮所包裹的”一类,因此特别说明为“在皮所包裹的乐器中”。“单面鼓”:如罐鼓、锅鼓、达达拉鼓等。成为皮所包裹后,再系上弦,即是“绷皮且系弦的”。因此说“系弦的帕那瓦鼓等”。牛口琴等也应视为包含在此类中。“竹等”:以“等”字含摄螺贝、角笛等。“合拍的”:即合拍的木铙钹、铜钹、石片钹、棍钹等。其中,合拍的木铙钹是木制的铙钹;铜钹是金属制的;以石板与铁片演奏的钹,则是石片棍钹。“善加应用的”:即正确地应用、具足。因此说“具足的”。以侍奉的方式具足五百种乐器。正是处于以这些乐器侍奉、具足的状态,故说“成为具足者”为其同义词。“令遍行”:显示巴利原文
Pañca aṅgāni etassāti pañcaṅgaṃ, pañcaṅgaṃ eva pañcaṅgikaṃ. Mahatīādi vīṇāvisesopi ātatamevāti ‘‘cammapariyonaddhesū’’ti visesitaṃ. Ekatalaṃ kumbhathūṇadaddarādi. Cammapariyonaddhaṃ hutvā tantibaddhaṃ ātatavitataṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tantibaddhapaṇavādī’’ti. Gomukhīādīnampi ettheva saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Vaṃsādīti ādi-saddena saṅkhasiṅgādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Sammādīti sammatāḷakaṃsatāḷasilāsalākatāḷādi. Tattha sammatāḷaṃ nāma daṇḍamayatāḷaṃ. Kaṃsatāḷaṃ lohamayaṃ. Silāya ayopattena ca vādanatāḷaṃ silāsalākatāḷaṃ. Samappitoti sammā appito upeto. Tenāha ‘‘upagato’’ti. Upaṭṭhānavasena pañcahi tūriyasatehi upeto. Evaṃbhūto ca yasmā tehi upaṭṭhito samannāgato nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samaṅgībhūtoti tasseva vevacana’’nti. Paricāretīti parito cāreti. Kāni pana cāreti, kathaṃ vā cāretīti āha ‘‘sampattiṃ…pe… cāretī’’ti. Tattha tato tatoti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vādite tattha tattha ca vādakajane. Apanetvāti vādakajane nisedhetvā. Tenāha ‘‘nissaddāni kārāpetvā’’ti. Devacārikaṃ gacchatiyeva devatānaṃ manussānañca anukampāya. Svāyamattho vimānavatthūhi (vi. va. 1) dīpetabbo.
392 「或因己事」(appeva sakena karaṇīyena):贤者目犍连,我们或许并非因自己的事务而忙碌。而且,正是由于诸天——即三十三天——的事务,才格外繁忙,这是义理的关联。有些居住于地面的天神,他们的事务也须由帝释裁决,因此说「从大地开始」(pathavito paṭṭhāya)。
「裁决时」(niyamento):在进行决断之时。为表明其事的具体状况,而说「因为诸天……」(devānaṃ hī…)等。
「那些」(tāsaṃ):指那些天女、天子们的侍从。
「装饰打扮的制作者」(maṇḍanapasādhanakārikā):即从事装饰打扮的女匠人。
「无裁决」(aṭṭakaraṇaṃ natthi):因为毫无疑惑。显示巴利原文
392.Appeva sakena karaṇīyenāti mārisa, moggallāna, mayaṃ sakena karaṇīyena appeva bahukiccāpi na homa. Apica devānaṃyevāti apica kho pana devānaṃyeva tāvatiṃsānaṃ karaṇīyena visesato bahukiccāti atthayojanā. Bhummaṭṭhakadevatānampi keci aṭṭā sakkena vinicchitabbā hontīti āha ‘‘pathavito paṭṭhāyā’’ti. Niyamentoti avadhārento. Taṃ pana karaṇīyaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘devānaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tāsanti devadhītudevaputtapādaparicārikānaṃ. Maṇḍanapasādhanakārikāti maṇḍanapasādhanasaṃvidhāyikā. Aṭṭakaraṇaṃ natthi saṃsayasseva abhāvato.
「那种」(yaṃ):即使是通过听闻、受持等已极为熟悉的义理,在智慧眼看来,也全然无法得见或显现。某些老师(即《摄要》的作者们)认为:「喜悦所生的悚惧」(somanassasaṃvega)是由喜悦生起的悚惧,而不是内心的恐慌。显示巴利原文
Yanti savanuggahaṇādivasena suparicitampi yaṃ atthajātaṃ. Na dissati, paññācakkhuno sabbaso na paṭibhātīti attho. Kecīti sārasamāsācariyā. Somanassasaṃveganti somanassasamuṭṭhānaṃ saṃvegaṃ, na cittasantāsaṃ.
「混战」(samupabyūḷho):因战斗而一同坠落、陷入。由于这种状态在聚集时形同团块,故说「聚集为一堆」(sannipatito rāsibhūto)。
「于紧接的有身」(anantare attabhāveti):这是将第二个帝释有身与其紧邻的前一个帝释有身,依「帝释有身」的共性视为同一而说的;否则应说「于第三有身」。因为摩伽有身是从此处算起的第三世。又,由于天众与阿修罗的那场大战,发生在紧接摩伽有身之前的有身,因此也说「于紧接的有身」。他怀着利益众生的愿望,通过奉事父母等善行,成就了如同菩萨行一般的行仪。七个誓愿分(satta vatapadānī)即七项誓约的内容。显示巴利原文
Samupabyūḷhoti yujjhanavasena sahapatito samogāḷho. Evaṃbhūto ca yasmā samūhavasena sampiṇḍito hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sannipatito rāsibhūto’’ti. Anantare attabhāveti idaṃ dutiyaṃ sakkattabhāvaṃ tato anantarātītena sakkattabhāvena sakkattabhāvasāmaññato ekamiva katvā gahaṇavasena vuttaṃ, aññathā ‘‘tatiye attabhāve’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā. Maghattabhāvo hi ito tatiyoti. Atha vā yasmiṃ attabhāve so devāsurasaṅgāmo ahosi, tassa anantarattā maghattabhāvassa vuttaṃ ‘‘anantare attabhāve’’ti. Sattānaṃ hitesitāya mātāpituupaṭṭhānādinā cariyāhi bodhisattacariyā viyassa cariyā ahosi. Satta vatapadānīti satta vatakoṭṭhāse.
「大饮」即大量的饮酒。「瘤饮」即瘤状之饮,意为极度过量地饮酒。「围护着」即围绕而加以保护。「栏杆基座」指须弥山边缘的栏杆围墙。「于五处」:在那五处的周边区域,由那先等安排了守护。显示巴利原文
Mahāpānanti mahantaṃ surāpānaṃ. Gaṇḍapānanti gaṇḍasurāpānaṃ, adhimattapānanti attho. Pariharamānāti parivārentā. Vedikāpādāti sinerussa pariyante vedikāparikkhepā. Pañcasu ṭhānesūti pañcasu paribhaṇḍaṭṭhānesu nāgasenādīhi ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesi.
393 「可爱性」意为令人愉悦之状态。「于杂色宝石柱」即于种种宝石所成之柱。「金等所成之罐」:如“银柱上安金罐,金柱上安银罐”等,指金等材质所造的罐及猛兽形象。「极度沉醉」即放逸,故说「极为沉醉」。「以戏舞随从」即由天女作为随从。显示巴利原文
393.Rāmaṇeyyakanti ramaṇīyabhāvaṃ. Masāragallatthambheti kabaramaṇimaye thambhe. Suvaṇṇādimaye ghaṭaketi ‘‘rajatatthambhesu suvaṇṇamaye, suvaṇṇatthambhesu rajatamaye’’tiādinā suvaṇṇādimaye ghaṭake vāḷarūpakāni ca. Pabāḷhaṃ mattoti pamatto. Tenāha ‘‘ativiya matto’’ti. Nāṭakaparivārenāti accharāparivārena.
「稀有奇特」:这两个词都只是表示惊异之状。因此,「已生稀有奇特」是说惊异之貌已在那些人心内生起,指如此生起的心念。「已生满足」即由稀有奇特之因而生起满足。「悚惧」指已生起悚惧感。而这种悚惧因为是对先前状态的内心动摇,故称为「动摇的」。显示巴利原文
Acchariyabbhutanti padadvayenapi vimhayanākārova vutto, tasmā sañjātaṃ acchariyabbhutaṃ vimhayanākāro etesanti sañjātaacchariyaabbhutā, tathā pavattacittuppādā. Acchariyabbhutahetukā sañjātā tuṭṭhi etesanti sañjātatuṭṭhino. Saṃvigganti sañjātasaṃvegaṃ. Svāyaṃ saṃvego yasmā purimāvatthāya cittassa calanaṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘calita’’nti.
394 “驱散黑暗”:由于见到神变,心中生起“啊!长老的神通威力真大!”的崇敬,从而趋向正行;同时又生起如理作意:“我们虽值遇这样的教法,却因沉湎于无义的财富而迷醉”,由此驱散了愚痴的黑暗。“这两位”指大长老目犍连与帝释,他们因曾共同修习梵行,故为“同梵行者”。显示巴利原文
394.Tamaṃ vinoditanti pāṭihāriyadassanena ‘‘aho therassa iddhānubhāvo’’ti sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ sañjātabahumāno, īdisaṃ nāma sāsanaṃ labhitvāpi mayaṃ niratthakena bhogamadena sammattā bhavāmāti yoniso manasikāruppādanena sammohatamaṃ vinoditaṃ vidhamitaṃ. Eteti mahāthero sakko cāti te dvepi samānabrahmacariyatāya sabrahmacārino.
395 “众所周知的”:指明显可知的四大天王天、夜摩天、兜率天、化乐天、他化自在天、大梵天这些天中的某一位,并非指任意不知名的天神,这是本意。由于借着已发起的法之力而得究竟,故依相应的关联方式作结。显示巴利原文
395.Paññātānanti pākaṭānaṃ cātumahārāja-suyāma-santusita-paranimmitavasavattimahābrahmānaṃ aññataro, na yesaṃ kesañcīti adhippāyo. Āraddhadhammavaseneva pariyosāpitattā yathānusandhināva niṭṭhapesi.
8. 《大爱尽经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā
396 “仅执取见解”:指错误的执取,而非对见的固执。“常见”:指对恒常的固执。“他”即指阿梨吒比丘。这里所说的“讲说后归结”是连属关系,而“归结”的意思是导出结论。“就在那些各处”:意指识在各各生命形态中便熄灭,而不会流转到另一生命形态。然而,其要义是:识的本性并未分裂,亦非别异。“从此世”:即此有身。“到他世”:即进入名为后世的有身。“流转”:由于未与任何恒常性相系,便如是去往来世。因此,他以此说法表达了从此世到他世的移动。“轮回”则以此表达了从他世再回到此世的移动。或者,“流转”是指有身之间的转移,而“轮回”是指在此处彼处不断循环往复。显示巴利原文
396.Laddhimattanti micchāgāhamattaṃ, na diṭṭhābhiniveso. Sassatadiṭṭhīti niccābhiniveso. Soti ariṭṭho bhikkhu. Kathetvā samodhānentanti yojanā. Samodhānentanti ca nigamentanti attho. Tattha tatthevāti tesu tesu eva bhavesu nirujjhanti, na bhavantaraṃ saṅkamanti. Viññāṇaṃ pana abhinnasabhāvaṃ anaññanti adhippāyo. Idhalokatoti imasmā attabhāvā. Paralokanti parabhavasaññitaṃ attabhāvaṃ. Sandhāvatīti niccatāya kenaci asambaddhaṃ viya gacchati. Tena idhalokato paralokagamanamāha. Saṃsaratīti iminā paralokato idhāgamanaṃ. Sandhāvatīti vā bhavantarasaṅkamanamāha. Saṃsaratīti tattha tattha aparāparasañcaraṇaṃ.
他以「有缘时则有」等文句,从随顺与遮遣两面揭示了识的缘生性,以此否定其常住性。而说「他说了佛陀未曾说之法」,则是为了指出:他在「行事破僧」的事缘中,将如来未曾说、未曾语的道理,当作了如来所说、所语来宣说。「打击胜者的教轮」意谓:当他认可「就是这个识……并非别异」为常时,便对导师最初所转起的、诸如「诸行皆无常」「比丘们,色是无常」的法轮形成障碍,因而予以打击。他将为一切知智所见、所宣说的无常之识,执为常时,也就是在抵触如来所具的自信智。他以执取常见的方式,欺骗了那些渴望听闻观道——这是证得圣法唯一之道——的众生。由此,他因排斥观道,完全偏离了圣道与圣法的大道。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paccaye sati bhavatī’’tiādinā viññāṇassa anvayato byatirekato ca paṭiccasamuppannabhāvaṃ dassento sassatabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Buddhena akathitaṃ kathesīti iminā ‘‘yaṃ abhāsitaṃ alapitaṃ tathāgatena, taṃ bhāsitaṃ lapitaṃ tathāgatenāti dīpetī’’ti (cūḷava. 352, 353) imasmiṃ bhedakaravatthusmiṃ sandissatīti dasseti. Jinacakke pahāraṃ detīti ‘‘tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ…pe… anañña’’nti niccataṃ paṭijānanto – ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā (dha. pa. 277), rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, anicca’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.93-94) ca ādinayappavatte satthu dhammacakke khīlaṃ uppādento pahāraṃ deti. Sabbaññutaññāṇena aniccanti diṭṭhaṃ paveditañca viññāṇaṃ niccanti paṭijānanto vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhati. Sotukāmaṃ jananti ariyadhammādhigamassa ekantaupāyabhūtaṃ vipassanāmaggaṃ sotukāmaṃ janaṃ niccaggāhapaggaṇhanena visaṃvādeti. Tato eva ariyapathe ariyadhammavīthiyaṃ tassā paṭikkhipanena tiriyaṃ nipatitvā.
398 他以识为首要,开显自己所执取之我,说:「尊者,凡是那个……」等。其中,「能说者」「能觉者」等语,正是执取常见的表现。「能说者」即「他说」之义,指语业的造作者。他以此向那些执著有造作者的有情,显示自己有能力令其觉悟利益与安乐。「能觉者」即「唯觉者应觉」,是了知、体验的意思。对于这类词语,精通声明的论师们多认为它们成立为「造作者」义。「他感受」是指他体验那些所应感受的对应事物。「于彼彼处」是指于那些有、生、趣、住、有情居、众生聚之中。显示巴利原文
398. Viññāṇasīsena attanā gahitaṃ attānaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘yvāyaṃ, bhante’’tiādimāha. Tattha vado vedeyyotiādayo sassatadiṭṭhiyā eva abhinivesākārā. Vadatīti vado, vacīkammassa kārakoti attho. Iminā hi kārakabhāvupāyikasattānaṃ hitasukhāvabodhanasamatthataṃ attano dasseti. Vediyova vedeyyo, jānāti anubhavati cāti attho. Īdisānañhi padānaṃ bahulā kattusādhanataṃ saddavidū maññanti. Vedayatīti taṃ taṃ anubhavitabbaṃ anubhavati. Tahiṃ tahinti tesu tesu bhavayonigatiṭhitisattāvāsasattanikāyesu.
399 沙地因高举并坚持此邪见,故当知其邪见之缘已被断绝,且其法不再增长。「下方」是依《蛇喻经注释》而说。在后文各处提及「下方」之处,道理亦同。「一个各别的连结」,是指不与三种连结相混,独立存在的一个连结。难道此连结不也是因沙地的意愿而转起,故仅是意愿连结吗?不然,因为它并非以导向出离为起点。所谓导向出离,是以出离为要,通过发问等方式转起者,其余方称为开示发问连结等。此处因无此导向出离,故称之为「一个各别的连结」。「清除大众的邪见」是指:无论沙地持有何种邪见,皆通过显示其邪见不成立来清除大众的邪见。正是由于清除了大众的邪见,沙地才等于被逐出了僧众。显示巴利原文
399. Taṃ vādaṃ paggayha ṭhitattā sātissa chinnapaccayatā aviruḷhadhammatā ca veditabbā. Heṭṭhāti alagaddasuttasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.236-237) sandhāyāha. Parato heṭṭhāti vuttaṭṭhānepi eseva nayo. Pāṭiyekko anusandhīti tīhipi anusandhīhi avomisso visuṃyeveko anusandhi. Nanu cāyampi sātissa ajjhāsayavasena pavattitattā ajjhāsayānusandhiyevāti? Na, niyyānamukhena appavattattā. Niyyānañhi purakkhatvā pucchādivasena pavattā itarā desanāpucchānusandhiādayo. Idha tadabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘pāṭiyekko anusandhī’’ti. Parisāya laddhiṃ sodhentoti yādisī sātissa laddhi, tadabhāvadassanavasena parisāya laddhiṃ sodhento, parisāya laddhisodhaneneva sāti gaṇato nissārito nāma jāto.
400 「无论任何」这句,虽然从通泛的角度是指缘法,但由于经中说「仅得识之称谓」,所以应理解为:各个识的共称、因相、缘生已被执取。因此,经文中说:「仅得眼识之称谓」等。或者,这里「无论任何」所执取的,是各个门所限定的、以及其他一切属于各个识的缘生;而其中不共的,则以其共称而说「仅得眼识之称谓」等。「没有门的迁移」是指识没有向其他门的迁移。这是以粗显的方法,为了令钝根者容易理解而示以理趣。实际上,现前的识灭去时,绝不会迁移到无间识,因为若无无间缘等缘,它就不会生起。显示巴利原文
400.Yaṃ yadevāti idaṃ yadipi avisesato paccayadhammaggahaṇaṃ, ‘‘viññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatī’’ti pana vuttattā taṃtaṃviññāṇassa samaññānimittapaccayajātaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ – ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatī’’tiādi. Atha vā taṃtaṃdvāraniyataṃ itarampi sabbaṃ tassa tassa viññāṇassa paccayajātaṃ idha ‘‘yaṃ yadevā’’ti gahitaṃ, tattha pana yaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ, tena samaññāti ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇantvevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dvārasaṅkantiyā abhāvanti viññāṇassa dvārantarasaṅkamanassa abhāvaṃ. Svāyaṃ oḷārikanayena mandabuddhīnaṃ sukhāvabodhanatthaṃ nayadassanavasena vutto. Na hi kadāci paccuppannaṃ viññāṇaṃ vigacchantaṃ anantaraviññāṇaṃ saṅkamati anantarādipaccayālābhe tassa anuppajjanato.
“同样地”(Evameva)的意思是:如同火依于燃料而燃烧,当没有燃料时,就在那里熄灭,不会转移到任何地方去;正是如此。为什么说“由于缘的缺失,就在那里灭尽”呢?难道这里不是指无生之灭吗?然而那样的灭并非此处所意指的,此处所指的是刹那灭,而刹那灭是自性如此,并非以缘的缺失为因。确实如此。但这里所意指的,是各个门路的识不转移到其他门,就在各自那里灭尽。而由于那些缘——依于它们才有各门路间识的转起——不存在,故说“缘的缺失”。因此,其联系是:由于缘的缺失,它不会转移到耳等门,而被称为耳识等。由此便表明了:依眼、色等缘和合而被称作眼识的识,由于是暂时性的,就在那里灭尽;而由于耳、声等缘的不存在,它又怎会有耳识等名称呢?如此,由于不转起,又怎会有转移呢?“在识的转起中”(Viññāṇappavatte)是指在识的转起状态中。“仅仅是门路的转移”(Dvārasaṅkantimattaṃ)的意思是:我连它转移到其他门路都不说,因为它就在那里坏灭,而缘是有生起的;当有生起时,灭是必然的。如此,以“有”……显示巴利原文
Evamevāti yathā aggi upādānaṃ paṭicca jalanto anupādāno tattheva nibbāyati, na katthaci saṅkamati, evameva. ‘‘Paccayavekallena tattheva nirujjhatī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, na hettha anuppādanirodho icchito tādisassa nirodhassa idha anadhippetattā, atha kho khaṇanirodho, so ca sābhāvikattā na paccayavekallahetuko? Saccametaṃ, taṃtaṃdvārikassa pana viññāṇassa dvārantaraṃ asaṅkamitvā tattha tattheva nirujjhanaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Yesañca paccayānaṃ vasena dvārantarikaviññāṇena bhavitabbaṃ, tesaṃ tadabhāvato paccayavekallaggahaṇaṃ, tasmā paccayavekallena na sotādīni saṅkamitvā sotaviññāṇantiādi saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti yojanā. Etena yaṃ viññāṇaṃ cakkhurūpādipaccayasāmaggiyā vasena cakkhuviññāṇasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, tattha tattheva nirujjhati tāvakālikabhāvato, tassa pana sotasaddādipaccayābhāvato kuto sotaviññāṇādisamaññā, evamappavattito tassa kuto saṅkamoti dassitaṃ hoti. Viññāṇappavatteti viññāṇappavattiyaṃ. Dvārasaṅkantimattanti dvārantarasaṅkamanamattampi na vadāmi tattha tattheva bhijjanato paccayassa uppādavantato sati ca uppāde avassaṃbhāvī nirodhoti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccatā dīpitā hotīti.
401 在圣典中,“缘起的识,我曾说;除了缘之外,不存在识的生起”这句话,通过随顺和简别的方式,所开示的正是识的有为性。因此注释者才说:“在开示了有缘的状态之后”。在此处,由因、缘所生起的事物被称为“存在”。从究竟义上来说,它就是五蕴,因为除了这个以五蕴为施设基础的有缘之法外,再无其他存在。而那个五蕴聚,对于他自己和那些比丘们,世尊称之为“此存在”。因此说:“这个五蕴聚”。“能带来自己的果”,所以是“食”,也就是“缘”。“由此而生”,这便是“生源”。此存在“以食为生源”,所以是“以食为生源”。因此说:“以缘为生源”。“彼缘之灭”是指,让五蕴聚得以生起的无明等缘,那些缘的无生之灭。至于刹那灭,它是不依赖其他原因的。显示巴利原文
401. ‘‘Paṭiccasamuppannaṃ viññāṇaṃ vuttaṃ mayā, aññatra paccayā natthi viññāṇassa sambhavo’’ti pāḷiyā anvayato ca byatirekato ca viññāṇassa saṅkhatatāva dassitāti āha ‘‘sappaccayabhāvaṃ dassetvā’’ti. Hetupaccayehi jātaṃ nibbattaṃ ‘‘bhūta’’nti idhādhippetaṃ, taṃ atthato pañcakkhandhā tabbinimuttassa sappaccayassa abhāvato, yañca khandhapañcakaṃ attano tesañca bhikkhūnaṃ, taṃ ‘‘bhūtamida’’nti bhagavā avocāti āha ‘‘idaṃ khandhapañcaka’’nti. Attano phalaṃ āharatīti āhāro, paccayo. Sambhavati etasmāti sambhavo, āhāro sambhavo etassāti āhārasambhavaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paccayasambhava’’nti. Tassa paccayassa nirodhāti yena avijjādinā paccayena khandhapañcakaṃ sambhavati, tassa paccayassa anuppādanirodhā. Khaṇanirodho pana kāraṇanirapekkho.
“难道不”(Nossūti)是一个表示疑惑的助词。因此,注释者说:“此物存在呢?还是不存在呢?”而“此物存在吧,难道不?”这一句,表达的是这样的疑惑:“这只是五蕴聚呢?还是另有一个‘我’或‘我所’呢?”而“它是以食为生源的吧,难道不?”这一句,表达的是这样的疑惑:“这个存在物是有因的呢?还是无因的呢?”正如通过这种方式表达了落入无因论的疑惑,同样地,也应视为表达了落入不平等因论的疑惑。因为从究竟意义上看,对于持不平等因论者而言,所谓的“存在”同样属于一种无因的状态。即便那些持不平等因论者,也只是一种他人的计度,所以可与持自性决定论等论者等同看待。“它以灭为法吧,难道不?”这一句,表达的是这样的疑惑:“这个存在物是无常的呢?还是常住的呢?”应当知道,此句也同样表达了“这是苦呢?还是不苦呢?”、“这是无我呢?还是并非无我呢?”的疑惑。因为对于无常的事物,它必然是苦等;而对于常的事物,这两者就都不存在了。“以如实的自体和共相”,即是以不颠倒的自体和共相,也就是从作用与自性而言。显示巴利原文
Nossūti saṃsayajotano nipātoti āha ‘‘bhūtaṃ nu kho idaṃ, na nu kho bhūta’’nti. Bhūtamidaṃ nossūti ca iminā khandhapañcakameva nu kho idaṃ, udāhu attattaniyanti evaṃjātiko saṃsayanākāro gahito. Tadāhārasambhavaṃ nossūti pana iminā sahetukaṃ nu kho idaṃ bhūtaṃ, udāhu ahetukanti yathā ahetukabhāvāpanno saṃsayanākāro gahito, evaṃ visamahetukabhāvāpannopi saṃsayanākāro gahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Visamahetunopi paramatthato bhūtassa ahetukabhāvato. Visamahetuvādopi parehi parikappitamattatāya sabhāvaniyatiyadicchādivādehi samānayogakkhamoti. Nirodhadhammaṃ nossūti iminā yathā aniccaṃ nu kho idaṃ bhūtaṃ, udāhu niccanti aniccataṃ paṭicca saṃsayanākāro gahito, evaṃ dukkhaṃ nu kho, udāhu na dukkhaṃ, anattā nu kho, udāhu na anattātipi saṃsayanākāro gahitoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ aniccassa dukkhabhāvādiavassaṃbhāvato, nicce ca tadubhayābhāvato. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇatoti aviparītasarasato salakkhaṇato ca, kiccato ceva sabhāvato cāti attho. Vipassanāya adhiṭṭhānabhūtāpi paññā vipassanā evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘vipassanāpaññāyā’’ti. Sarasatoti ca sabhāvato. Salakkhaṇatoti sāmaññalakkhaṇato. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanāpaññāya sammā passantassā’’ti. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato’’ti vuttanayeneva. Ye yeti tassaṃ parisāyaṃ ye ye bhikkhū. Sallakkhesunti sammadeva upadhāresuṃ.
“Tehi(那些)”:指那些比丘。“Tattha(在那里)”:指在那观慧之中。“Nittaṇhabhāva(无渴爱状态)”:指渴爱的消失,即“这是我的”这种渴爱执取已被断除。世尊也以此义斥责萨遮迦:“比丘们,我对于诸法也是称赞断除渴爱的;然而,这个愚人萨遮迦却还在此有身之中,执着于那套增长渴爱的颠倒见,紧执不放。”“Sabhāvadassanena(以见真实性)”:指以无颠倒的方式观察诸法的真实性。“Paccayadassanena(以见缘)”:指观察因,即毫无遗漏地观察因与缘。“Allīyetha(会依止)”:指依止于渴爱与邪见而执取。因此,经文说“以渴爱与见”。“Kelāyetha(会珍爱)”:指以呵护、取乐的方式执持。因此,经文说“你们会以游戏的心态而安住”。“Dhanaṃ viya icchantā(如同渴望财富)”:指如同对财富、物质生起贪欲、渴爱那样。因此,经文说“你们会生起贪求”。“Mamattaṃ uppādeyyāthā(生起我所执)”:指通过渴爱与邪见,生起“这是我的”。显示巴利原文
Tehīti tehi bhikkhūhi. Tatthāti tissaṃ vipassanāpaññāyaṃ. Nittaṇhabhāvanti taṇhābhāvaṃ ‘‘etaṃ mama’’nti taṇhāggāhassa pahīnataṃ. Etenapi bhagavā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammesupi taṇhāpahānameva vaṇṇemi, sāti pana moghapuriso attabhāvepi taṇhāsaṃvaddhaniṃ viparītadiṭṭhiṃ paggayha tiṭṭhatī’’ti sātiṃ niggaṇhāti. Sabhāvadassanenāti dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvadassanena. Paccayadassanenāti kāraṇadassanena anavasesato hetuno paccayassa ca dassanena. Allīyethāti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena nissayetha. Tenāha ‘‘taṇhādiṭṭhīhī’’ti. Kelāyethāti pariharaṇakeḷiyā parihareyyātha. Tenāha ‘‘kīḷamānā vihareyyāthā’’ti. Dhanaṃ viya icchantāti dhanaṃ viya drabyaṃ viya icchaṃ taṇhaṃ janentā. Tenāha ‘‘gedhaṃ āpajjeyyāthā’’ti. Mamattaṃ uppādeyyāthāti ‘‘mamamida’’nti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena abhinivesaṃ janeyyātha. Nikantivasenapi gahaṇatthāya no desito, tassa vā saṇhasukhumassa vipassanādhammassa gahaṇaṃ nāma nikantiyā eva siyā, na oḷārikataṇhāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘nikantivasenā’’ti.
402 “缘于此,果从此生起”(Paṭicca etasmā phalaṃ eti),因此称为缘,泛指一切特殊的因缘状态。所以注释师说:“开示诸蕴的缘”。实际上,直至无明,诸蕴的一切特殊因缘在此都已开示。接着,从开头一直到结尾,再从结尾一直到开头,也就是依顺、逆两种方式,以观察轮转与还灭,从多种理路开示了缘起;借此阐明:在这里,作为执取为常的因相的烦恼也是不存在的。而所谓“这也属于前文所述之义”(Tampi vuttatthamevāti),是指从“比丘们,这四种食”直到“以爱为集起”这段经文,其义在《正见经》的注释中已经阐述过了。其余的部分,因为属于缘起的范围,在《清净道论》中有详述,因此便以这前面提到的概括来含括了。显示巴利原文
402. Paṭicca etasmā phalaṃ etīti paccayo, sabbo kāraṇavisesoti āha ‘‘khandhānaṃ paccayaṃ dassento’’ti. Yāva avijjā hi sabbo nesaṃ kāraṇaviseso idha dassito. Puna ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā, antato paṭṭhāya yāva ādīti anulomato paṭilomato ca vaṭṭavivaṭṭadassanavasena nānānayehi paṭiccasamuppādo dassito, niccaggāhassa nimittabhūto kilesopi idha natthīti dīpeti. Tampi vuttatthamevāti tampi ‘‘ime ca, bhikkhave, cattāro āhārā’’tiādi yāva ‘‘taṇhāpabhavā’’ti pāḷipadaṃ, tāva vuttatthameva sammādiṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.89). Sesaṃ paṭiccasamuppādakathābhāvato visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.570) vitthāritāvāti imināva saṅgahitaṃ.
404 关于“此有故彼有”等经文中应解说的义理,应依《胜义灯·自说经注》所述的方法来了解。显示巴利原文
404.Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paramatthadīpaniyaṃ udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. 1) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
407 “回溯”(Paṭidhāvanā)即归趣、依止,意指针对自己过去已历的往昔时光,以贪爱与邪见为驱动的逆向趋赴。若问:经文中“回溯”岂不是以疑为因而出现?确实是以疑为因出现,但此疑以贪爱与邪见为根本因,故(注释师)说“以贪爱与邪见为因”。而“在那里”(Tattha),是指在那依所证悟之法而生起的如实知见中。显示巴利原文
407.Paṭidhāvanāti paṭisaraṇaṃ, pubbe attano āgataṃ atītaṃ addhānaṃ uddissa taṇhādiṭṭhivasena paṭigamananti attho. Nanu vicikicchāvasena pāḷiyaṃ paṭidhāvanā āgatāti? Saccaṃ āgatā, sā pana taṇhādiṭṭhihetukāti ‘‘taṇhādiṭṭhivasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ yathādhigate ñāṇadassane.
“不动性”(Niccalabhāvaṃ)是指善能安住的状态,以及不被外道言论之风吹动的不动性。“尊者”(Garū)是指具足尊贵功德者。“有分量”(Bhāriko)是指如同石伞一样〔的重担〕。“不愿却应随顺者”(Akāmā anuvattitabbo)是指仅凭一些表面信心而去随顺,并不是以不坏净信来随顺。“应作之事”(Kiccaṃ)是指佛陀作为导师应做的事。“婆罗门”(Brāhmaṇānaṃ)是指那些依出身而称为婆罗门的人。“禁戒受持”(Vatasamādānāni)是指对于道戒等各种禁戒的受持。“见之好奇”(Diṭṭhikutūhalāni)是指依于执取各种不同的邪见,比如说“这是真的,那才是真的”等等,而应被执取的各种好奇见解。“如是出离”(Evaṃ nissaṭṭhāni)是指:正如我给你们教诲的那样,对于这些已经出离、舍弃了的禁戒等,你们若违越了它,又能执取什么呢?“自己以智慧所了知”(Sayaṃ ñāṇena ñātaṃ)是指:解除了由他人主导的状态,完全只以自己的智慧如实了知。而这如实了知的事,就称为自己亲证所见,因此〔注释师〕说:“自己以慧眼所亲见”(Sayaṃ paññācakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ)。“自己明了”(Sayaṃ vibhāvitaṃ)是指:那些比丘们对该义理,各自都达到了现前明了的境界。被“引入”(Upanītā)是指:通过教诫的方便,随着说法教示而被引导进入了〔此法〕。“于我”(Mayā),这里是在作者的意义上使用具格。“依法”(Dhammenā)是指凭靠理则。“此语”(Etaṃ vacanaṃ)是指这“是现见的”等语。显示巴利原文
Niccalabhāvanti suppatiṭṭhitabhāvaṃ, titthiyavādavātehi akampiyabhāvañca. Garūti garuguṇayutto. Bhāriko pāsāṇacchattasadiso. Akāmā anuvattitabboti saddhāmattakeneva anuvattanamāha, na aveccappasādena. Kiccanti satthukiccaṃ. Brāhmaṇānanti jātimantabrāhmaṇānaṃ. Vatasamādānānīti magavatādivatasamādānāni. Diṭṭhikutūhalānīti taṃtaṃdiṭṭhiggāhavasena ‘‘idaṃ saccaṃ, idaṃ sacca’’ntiādinā gahetabbakutūhalāni. Evaṃ nissaṭṭhānīti yathā mayā tumhākaṃ ovādo dinno, evaṃ nissaṭṭhāni vatādīni taṃ atikkamitvā kiṃ gaṇheyyātha. Sayaṃ ñāṇena ñātanti paraneyyataṃ muñcitvā attano eva ñāṇena yāthāvato ñātaṃ. Evaṃbhūtañca sayaṃ paccakkhato diṭṭhaṃ nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sayaṃ paññācakkhunā diṭṭha’’nti. Sayaṃ vibhāvitanti tehi bhikkhūhi tassa atthassa paccattaṃ vibhūtabhāvaṃ āpāditaṃ. Upanītāti upakkamena dhammadesanānusārena nītā. Mayāti kattari karaṇavacanaṃ. Dhammenāti kāraṇena. Etaṃ vacananti etaṃ ‘‘sandiṭṭhiko’’tiādivacanaṃ.
408 〔有执著的世间〕那是此世间的迷乱之处。“以相会”(Samodhānenāti)即是以集合。“胎”(Gabbha):因为它是依“有身”的体性而转起的,故称为胎,也就是从羯逻蓝等阶段开始的法相续。然而,以此为所依的众生相续被说为“胎”,正如我们说“床在高声呼喊”一样,是以所依来命名的。由于母胎是〔众生〕胎的所依之处,故应知此处所说的“胎”是指母胎,或者也可理解为如胎的譬喻。正如有情的居室因为是居住之处而称为“胎”,同样,对于那些处于母胎睡眠中的〔众生〕而言,直到诞生为止,母胎都是他们的居住之处,因此母胎也被称为“胎”。显示巴利原文
408.Taṃ sammohaṭṭhānaṃ assa lokassa. Samodhānenāti samāgamena. Gabbhati attabhāvabhāvena vattatīti gabbho, kalalādiavattho dhammapabandho, tannissitattā pana sattasantāno ‘‘gabbho’’ti vutto yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. Tannissayabhāvato mātukucchi ‘‘gabbho’’ti veditabbo, gabbho viyāti vā. Yathā hi nivāsaṭṭhānatāya sattānaṃ ovarako ‘‘gabbho’’ti vuccati, evaṃ gabbhaseyyakānaṃ yāva abhijāti nivāsaṭṭhānatāya mātukucchi ‘‘gabbho’’ti vuttoti.
“于某一夜”(Yamekarattiṃ)是指在某一个夜中。此处是将处格用作役格,或表示持续关联。“最初”(Paṭhamaṃ)是指最初始,即于结生刹那。“在胎中”(Gabbhe)是指在母胎中。“人”(Māṇavoti)即是有情。因为众生大多在夜间结生,所以特别提到“夜”。“如已升起的云”(Abbhuṭṭhitovāti):犹如已升起的云,或者说,他是正面朝向死亡而现起,这便是所要表达的意思。“他向前去”(So yātīti)是指:此人从最初那一刹那起,便持续不断地向前去。“他如此前往,不曾回转”(Sa gacchaṃ na nivattatīti)是指:他如此向前去,刹那也不退转,唯有一向趣向死亡。这就是这首偈颂的含义。显示巴利原文
Yamekarattinti yassaṃ ekarattiyaṃ. Bhummatthe hi idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, accantasaṃyoge vā. Paṭhamanti sabbapaṭhamaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe. Gabbheti mātukucchiyaṃ. Māṇavoti satto. Yebhuyyena sattā rattiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantīti rattiggahaṇaṃ. Abbhuṭṭhitovāti uṭṭhitaabbho viya, abhimukhabhāvena vā uṭṭhito eva maraṇassāti adhippāyo. So yātīti so māṇavo yāti paṭhamakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya gacchateva. Sa gacchaṃ na nivattatīti so evaṃ gacchanto khaṇamattampi na nivattati, aññadatthu maraṇameva upagacchatīti gāthāya attho.
这是针对“时节”(Utusamayaṃ)而说的,并非世间共许的尘垢附着天数。为使前文之义更为明晰,复言“据说,对于女人……”等语。“在那里”(Tattha)是指在那胎藏中。“安住后”(Saṇṭhahitvāti)指形成后。“破裂后”(Bhijjitvāti)指未受孕的胎藏自行破裂。这便是她的本性。“处所清净”(Vatthu suddhaṃ hotīti)指因流出血液、无有疾病,胎藏变得清净。由于处所得清净,此后数日,胎藏便如同田地,因尚有一些残血存在,可作为着床的依托。然而,如何能有怀孕的可能呢?因此说:“于其时……”等语。即使于女人的相续中,也存有精质,所以说“即使通过触摸肢节,童子也能出生”。例如王后通过触摸菩萨的脐部而生下菩萨,具祥瑞女通过触摸脐部而生下曼荼毗耶。“乾闼婆”(gandhabbo):由于“嗅”(gandhana)的作用——通过显现生趣之相而作提示,故称为“香”(gandha)。以此香为名、能趣向有的业力而流转者,即称为“乾闼婆”,也就是那将投生该处的……显示巴利原文
Utusamayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na lokasamaññātarajassa lagganadivasamattaṃ. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘mātugāmassa kira yasmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ gabbhāsaye. Saṇṭhahitvāti nibbattitvā. Bhijjitvāti aggahitagabbhā eva bhinnā hutvā. Ayañhi tassā sabhāvo. Vatthu suddhaṃ hotīti paggharitalohitattā anāmayattā ca gabbhāsayo suddho hoti. Suddhavatthuttā tato paraṃ katipayadivasāni khettameva hoti gabbhasaṇṭhahanassa parittassa lohitalesassa vijjamānattā. Sambhavassa pana kathaṃ sabbhāvoti āha ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’tiādi. Itthisantānepi sukkadhātu labbhateva. Tenāha ‘‘aṅgaparāmasanenapi dārako nibbattatiyevā’’ti. Yathā pārikāya nābhiparāmasanena sāmassa bodhisattassa, diṭṭhamaṅgalikāya nābhiparāmasanena maṇḍabyassa nibbatti. Gandhabboti gandhanato uppajjanagatiyā nimittupaṭṭhāpanena sūcanato gandhoti laddhanāmena bhavagāmikammunā abbati pavattatīti gandhabbo, tattha uppajjanakasatto. Tenāha ‘‘tatrūpagasatto’’ti. Kammayantayantitoti tatrūpapattiāvahena kammasaṅkhātena pellanakayantena tathattāya pellito upanīto. Mahantena jīvitasaṃsayenāti vijāyanaparikkilesena ‘‘jīvissāmi kho, na nu kho jīvissāmi ahaṃ vā, putto vā me’’ti evaṃ pavattena jīvitasaṃsayena vipulena garutarena saṃsayena. Taṃ ṭhānanti thanappadesamāha. Kīḷanti tenāti kīḷanaṃ, kīḷanameva kīḷanakaṃ.
409 “执著”(Sārajjatīti)指内心极度贪着。“嗔恚”(Byāpajjatīti)指内心生起嗔怒。“身至念”(Kāye kesādidvattiṃsāsucisamudāye taṃsabhāvārammaṇā sati kāyasati)是以头发等三十二种不净所集之身为自性所缘的念。“未善建立”(Anupaṭṭhapetvāti)指未生起,也就是未如其自性地观察此身。“小量心”(Parittacetasoti)指被烦恼所破坏、支离破碎的心,因此说为“不善心”。这些是不善法。“灭”(Nirujjhantīti)指到达灭尽的状态。“以爱为缘而喜悦”(Abhinandatīti)指以带喜的爱,朝向所缘而喜悦。“迎向”(Abhivadatīti)指以爱为性,依附于种种所缘而说。“执取”(Ajjhosāyāti)指以爱为因,犹如进入那不共通于他人的所缘当中,因此说“吞没、消化后”。如何是喜悦苦?应知:喜悦苦因的人,便称为喜悦苦。不过,在注释书中,为了显示“凡是对苦恒存爱见、显示巴利原文
409.Sārajjatīti sārattacitto hoti. Byāpajjatīti byāpannacitto hoti. Kāye kesādidvattiṃsāsucisamudāye taṃsabhāvārammaṇā sati kāyasati. Anupaṭṭhapetvāti anuppādetvā, yathāsabhāvato kāyaṃ anupadhāretvāti attho. Parittacetasoti kilesehi parito khaṇḍitacitto. Tenāha ‘‘akusalacitto’’ti. Ete akusaladhammā. Nirujjhantīti nirodhaṃ pattā honti. Taṇhāvasena abhinandatīti sappītikataṇhāvasena abhimukhaṃ hutvā nandati. Abhivadatīti taṇhāvasena taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ abhinivissa vadati. Ajjhosāyāti anaññasādhāraṇaṃ viya ārammaṇaṃ taṇhāvasena anupavisitvā. Tenāha ‘‘gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā’’ti. Dukkhaṃ kathaṃ abhinandatīti ettha dukkhahetukaṃ abhinandanto dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāmāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yāvatā yassa dukkhe diṭṭhitaṇhā abhinandanā appahīnā, tāvatāyaṃ dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāmāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ahaṃ dukkhito mama dukkhanti gaṇhanto abhinandati nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena gāhadvayahetukā tattha abhinandanāti dasseti. Puna ekavāranti punapi ekavāraṃ. Phalahetusandhihetuphalasandhivasena dvisandhī. ‘‘Gabbhassāvakkanti hotī’’tiādinā atthato sarūpato ca etarahi phalasaṅkhepassa. Sarūpeneva ca itaradvayassa desitattā āha ‘‘tisaṅkhepa’’nti.
410-414 在此,为了以受作为切入点,简略地为比丘中的止行人说明直至阿拉汉果的业处,因此说“你们应略持爱尽解脱”。而世尊也如所开示的教说那样,说出“此爱尽解脱”,故称“此……爱尽……解脱教说”。既然如此,为何将教说称为解脱?解释说:“因教说能引导人到达那解脱,故称为解脱。”那位比丘由于那种爱欲之力,如同披上了常见的大缠缚,那种教说对于一切佛陀来说,即使扶持手臂也难令其晓悟,所以说他“为宏大爱网、爱缠缚所披覆”。“宏大爱网”(Mahātaṇhājāle)即巨大的爱的纠结中。“爱缠缚”(Taṇhāsaṅghāṭe)即爱的缠缚中。而他既处此状,也就含摄其中,故说“入彼中、属于彼”。其余文句容易了解。显示巴利原文
410-414. Samathayānikassa bhikkhuno vedanāmukhena saṅkhepeneva yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ idha kathitanti āha ‘‘saṃkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṃ dhārethā’’ti. ‘‘Imaṃ taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutti’’nti ca bhagavā yathādesitaṃ desanaṃ avocāti vuttaṃ ‘‘imaṃ…pe… vimuttidesana’’nti . Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ desanā vimuttīti āha ‘‘desanā hi…pe… vimuttīti vuttā’’ti. Yassā taṇhāya vasena sāti bhikkhu sassataggāhamahāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukko, sā sabbabuddhānaṃ desanā hatthāvalambamānepi durugghāṭiyā jātāti āha ‘‘mahātaṇhājālataṇhāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukka’’nti. Mahātaṇhājāleti mahante taṇhājaṭe. Taṇhāsaṅghāṭeti taṇhāya saṅghāṭe. Tathābhūto ca tassa abbhantare kato nāma hotīti āha ‘‘anupaviṭṭho antogadho’’ti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第九 《大马邑经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Mahāassapurasuttavaṇṇanā
415 “地方人”(Jānapadino)指拥有地方的人,或依种姓而称为“盎伽”(Aṅgā)的地方领主、王子们。他们的住处若是一个地方,为何用复数?答:“依惯用词。”因为文法家在这些情形中,视同合乎规则一般,要求词性和数一致(参见波你尼经1.2.51)。此处的惯例如“住于俱卢人中”“住于末罗人中”等。然而,当“地方”一词作为修饰语时,如同“种姓”一词,唯用单数,故说“在盎伽地方”。有人说,“assa”指石头,因那里有美丽的石头,此镇便名为“石城”(Assapura)。又有人说,国王的一匹良马(assa)在那里被捉获,故称“石城”。何必追究这些,那只是一个镇名而已。然而,世尊在彼处并无固定的住处,因此只说“以彼为行乞村而住”。正如经中说:“盎伽人有个名为石城的镇子。”这仅仅是在说明行乞村而已。显示巴利原文
415.Jānapadinoti janapadavanto, janapadassa vā issarā rājakumārā gottavasena aṅgā nāma. Tesaṃ nivāso yadi eko janapado , kathaṃ bahuvacananti āha ‘‘ruḷhīsaddenā’’ti. Akkharacintakā hi īdisesu ṭhānesu yutte viya saliṅgavacanāni (pāṇini 1.2.51) icchanti. Ayamettha ruḷhī yathā ‘‘kurūsu viharati, mallesu viharatī’’ti ca. Tabbisesane pana janapadasadde jātisadde ekavacanameva. Tenāha ‘‘aṅgesu janapade’’ti. Assā vuccanti pāsāṇāni, tāni sundarāni tattha santīti ‘‘assapura’’nti so nigamo vuttoti kecī. Apare pana ājānīyo asso rañño tattha gahaṇaṃ upagatoti ‘‘assapura’’nti vuttoti vadanti. Kiṃ tehi, nāmametaṃ tassa nigamassa. Yasmā pana tattha bhagavato nibaddhavasanaṭṭhānaṃ kiñci nāhosi, tasmā ‘‘taṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā viharati’’cceva vuttaṃ. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘assapuraṃ nāma aṅgānaṃ nigamo’’ti gocaragāmakittanameva kataṃ.
在“以如此戒”等句中,“戒”字指的是遮止恶行的戒,由此显示正语、正业、正命。“行”字指的是应行的戒,由此显示清净的身行与口行。“行道”一词则含摄止、观、道、果的正行道。“有惭者”是说明前述戒与行的根本原因;“可爱者”是说明清净;“大功德者”是说明行道的圆满。“他们赞叹比丘僧团的功德”——这是指那些在家信众多半乐于赞扬比丘们功德而说的。但其实他们对正法与正自觉者也同样深信,故说“佛的信奉者、法的信奉者”。因为对三宝中任一深信,由于它们不相离,对另外两者也必然深信。“恭敬应供”是一种借喻的说法,如同说“用乌鸦来保护酥油”,实际意思是“以修行报答资具供养”。也就是说,为了让施主们的供养因自己的正行而成就大果报,这里“恭敬应供”正是此意。显示巴利原文
Evarūpena sīlenātiādīsu sīlaggahaṇena vārittasīlamāha. Tena sammāvācākammantājīve dasseti. Ācāraggahaṇena cārittasīlaṃ. Tena parisuddhaṃ kāyavacīsamācāraṃ. Paṭipattiggahaṇena samathavipassanāmaggaphalasaṅgahaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ. Lajjinoti iminā yathāvuttasīlācāramūlakāraṇaṃ. Pesalāti iminā pārisuddhiṃ. Uḷāraguṇāti iminā paṭipattiyā pāripūriṃ. Bhikkhusaṅghasseva vaṇṇaṃ kathentīti idaṃ tesaṃ upāsakānaṃ yebhuyyena bhikkhūnaṃ guṇakittanapasutatāya vuttaṃ. Te pana saddhammepi sammāsambuddhepi abhippasannā eva. Tenāha ‘‘buddhamāmakā dhammamāmakā’’ti. Vatthuttaye hi ekasmiṃ abhippasannā itaradvaye abhippasannā eva tadavinābhāvato. Piṇḍapātāpacāyaneti lakkhaṇavacanametaṃ yathā ‘‘kākehi sappi rakkhitabba’’nti, tasmā paccayapaṭipūjaneti vuttaṃ hoti. Paccayadāyakānañhi kārassa attano sammāpaṭipattiyā mahapphalabhāvassa karaṇaṃ idha ‘‘piṇḍapātāpacāyana’’nti adhippetaṃ.
“能作沙门”意为成就沙门性、能令成就沙门性者。而这些法必定是在自己相续中生起并增长的,故说“受持而圆满”。此处“沙门”一词是依沙门的意义而说,并非仅就一般意义而言,故说“寂灭诸恶的沙门”。“能作婆罗门”也应依上述方式理解其义。所说“沙门、婆罗门”的差别,只是言辞上的不同,并非义理上的不同。“沙门所应行之法”指安住于沙门法中所应成就的法。即:一个在下等学处所摄的沙门性中善安立的人,他所应成就的上等学处所摄沙门性诸法,便依此而说为“沙门所应行之法”。为了说明这些也确实是能成就沙门性的,故说“它们也是能作沙门的”。而在此处,即《大马邑经》中,依惭、愧等详细展开:以惭、愧、清净身行、口行、意行、命清净、根律仪、饮食知量、警寤功德、正念正知、禅那、明等,详细宣说了能作沙门的法,不像在《三集》中那样简略。以“果”字即已包含异熟果,而此依最胜说,应知为四种沙门果。以“功德”字包含可爱、可意等利益。“即是彼义”即是对那个不可驳斥句子的义理说明。以“若彼”等通过遮遣方式说明其义。“以此篇幅”指以此段经文。对惭、愧等显示巴利原文
Samaṇakaraṇāti samaṇabhāvakarā, samaṇabhāvassa kārakāti attho. Te pana ekantato attano santāne uppāditā vaḍḍhitā ca hontīti āha ‘‘samādāya paripūritā’’ti. Samaṇaggahaṇañcettha samaṇavasena, na sāmaññamattenāti āha ‘‘samitapāpasamaṇa’’nti. Brāhmaṇakaraṇāti etthāpi vuttanayenevattho veditabbo. Byañjanato eva cāyaṃ bhedo, yadidaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇāti , na atthato. Samaṇenakattabbadhammāti samaṇadhamme ṭhitena sampādetabbadhammā. Yo hi heṭṭhimasikkhāsaṅkhātasamaṇabhāve suppatiṭṭhito, tena ye uparisikkhāsaṅkhātasamaṇabhāvā sampādetabbā, tesaṃ vaseneva vuttasamaṇena kattabbadhammā vuttāti. Tathā hi tesaṃ samaṇabhāvāvahataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tepi ca samaṇakaraṇā hontiyevā’’ti. Idha panāti mahāassapure. Hirottappādivasena desanā vitthāritāti hirottappa-parisuddhakāyavacīmanosamācārājīvaindriyasaṃvara-bhojanemattaññuta- jāgariyānuyogasatisampajañña-jhānavijjāvasena samaṇakaraṇadhammadesanā vitthārato desitā, na tikanipāte viya saṅkhepato. Phalaggahaṇeneva vipākaphalaṃ gahitaṃ, taṃ pana ukkaṭṭhaniddesena catubbidhaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ānisaṃsaggahaṇena piyamanāpatādiudrayo. Tasseva atthoti tasseva avañcāpadasseva atthaniddeso. ‘‘Yassā hī’’tiādinā byatirekavasena atthaṃ vadati. Ettakena ṭhānenāti ettakena pāḷipadesena. Hirottappādīnaṃ upari pāḷiyaṃ vuccamānānaṃ samaṇakaraṇadhammānaṃ. Vaṇṇaṃ kathesīti guṇaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ abhāsi. Satipaṭṭhāne vuttanayenāti ‘‘apica vaṇṇabhaṇanameta’’ntiādinā satipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106) vuttanayena.
416 “Yaṃ hirīyatīti”(他因此而惭)的意思是:他因为那个法,或以那个法为因,而对恶感到厌恶。此处为工具格用于反身的意义。也可将“yaṃ”看作性的颠倒,实际指的就是那个“法”。而“hirīyitabbenā”(所应惭)是以工具格表示对象,指所应惭的对象——与身恶行等相应的状态。“ottappitabbenā”(所应愧)的解释方式相同。“内”(ajjhattaṃ)指自我内在,以自身种姓等为生起之源,这样的惭称为“内源之惭”;“外”(bahiddhā)则是以自身之外、相对于自己存在的其他有情作为生起之源,这样的愧称为“外源之愧”。依于“以自为尊”的,是“自增上”,即是以自己为尊主而转起。安住于惭耻本性,即持续处于对恶法厌恶的本性之中。拥有敬畏特相,是指对师长的一切教诫,基于尊重而随顺承诺——这里“随承诺”意为与承诺共存,那种承诺本身及所含的尊重状态,都称为随承诺。透过省察自己种姓等显示巴利原文
416.Yaṃ hirīyatīti yena dhammena hetubhūtena vā jigucchati. Karaṇe hetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Yanti vā liṅgavipallāsena vutto, dhammoti attho. Hirīyitabbenāti upayogatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, hirīyitabbayuttakaṃ kāyaduccaritādinti attho. Ottappitabbenāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Ajjhattaṃ niyakajjhattaṃ jātiādi samuṭṭhānaṃ etissāti ajjhattasamuṭṭhānā hirī, bahiddhā attato bahibhūto parasatto samuṭṭhānaṃ etissāti bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ ottappaṃ. Attādhipatito āgatā attādhipateyyā, attānaṃ adhipatiṃ katvā pavattā. Lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitāti pāpajigucchanasabhāvaṭṭhāyinī. Sappatissavalakkhaṇattā garunā kismiñci vutte gāravavasena patissavanaṃ patissavo, saha patissavenāti sappatissavaṃ, patissavabhūtaṃ taṃsabhāvañca yaṃ kiñci gāravaṃ. Jātiādimahattatāpaccavekkhaṇena uppajjamānā ca hirī tattha gāravavasena pavattatīti sappatissavalakkhaṇāti vuccati. Bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitanti pāpato bhāyanasabhāvaṭṭhāyī, vajjabhīrukabhayadassāvilakkhaṇattā vajjaṃ bhāyati taṃ bhayato passatīti vajjabhīrukabhayadassāvī, evaṃsabhāvaṃ ottappaṃ. Ajjhattasamuṭṭhānāditā ca hirottappānaṃ tattha tattha pākaṭabhāveneva vuccati, na paresaṃ kadāci aññamaññavippayogā. Na hi lajjanaṃ nibbhayaṃ, pāpabhayaṃ vā alajjanaṃ hotīti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1.balarāsivaṇṇanā) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Lokamariyādassa pālanato lokapāladhammā nāma. Sukkāti odātā pabhassarabhāvakārakā, sukkābhijātihetutāya vā sukkā. Sambhedanti ācāramariyādāsaṅkaraṃ. Devabhāvāvahā dhammāti devadhammā.
「白法具备者」指的是具足上述白法的人。「寂静者」是指已止息烦恼的人。「善士」是指内心寂静的人。因为只有能够成办自他利益的人,才称得上是真正的善士。显示巴利原文
Sukkadhammasamāhitāti yathāvuttasukkadhammasamaṅgino. Santoti vūpasantadosā. Sappurisāti santajanā. Saparahitasādhakā hi sādhavo.
整体不离其组成部分,而通过组成部分即可指称整体,因此「教诫具足」即指能带来教诫成就的那部分教诫。在此处的马邑城,这些惭与愧的法则便被称作「沙门法」,以此表明它们是能根本成就沙门身份的法。正因如此,才首先去把握它们。显示巴利原文
Avayavavinimuttassa samudāyassa abhāvato, avayavena ca samudāyassa apadisitabbato ovādūpasampadāvahaovādekadeso ovādūpasampadāti. Idhāti imasmiṃ assapure. Ete hirottappadhammā. Samaṇadhammā nāmāti dassitā mūlabhūtasamaṇabhāvakarā dhammāti katvā. Tathā hi tesaṃ ādito gahaṇaṃ.
证得它之后,便不再依假名而能真实地被称为沙门的,即是圣道。以「这是沙门的业、是行道」的角度,它被称为「沙门性」;然而,由于它是圣道的果,以及作为所缘而应被敬奉的缘故,圣果与涅槃同样也是沙门的意义。「令贪灭尽,故称贪尽」,这是指圣道;「贪在此灭尽,故称贪尽」,这是指涅槃;至于圣果,则是随因立名,也应理解为贪尽。嗔尽、痴尽的解释也是如此。所谓「沙门性之义」,若就沙门性本身的道理而言,是指圣道;若指沙门性的果,则是指圣果。因此说:「将道与果合在一起,统称为沙门的意义。」这是以最殊胜的方式所作的解释。因为在此,戒等这些前行之道也同样被纳入了「沙门的意义」之中。正因如此,经中才会说:当还有更上应作之事时。而「paṭivedayāmi」(我宣说)就是反复告知的意思。显示巴利原文
Yassa adhigamena nippariyāyato samaṇā nāma honti, so ariyamaggo ‘‘samaṇassa kammaṃ paṭipadā’’ti katvā sāmaññaṃ, tassa pana phalabhāvato, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena araṇīyato phalanibbānāni sāmaññattho. Rāgaṃ khepetīti rāgakkhayo, ariyamaggo. Rāgo khīyati etthāti rāgakkhayo, nibbānaṃ. Phalaṃ pana kāraṇūpacārena rāgakkhayo daṭṭhabbo. Dosakkhayo mohakkhayoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sāmaññabhūto attho sāmaññattho, maggo, sāmaññassa atthoti sāmaññattho, phalanti āha ‘‘maggampi phalampi ekato katvā sāmaññattho kathito’’ti. Tayidaṃ ukkaṭṭhaniddesena vuttaṃ. Sīlādipubbabhāgapaṭipadāpi hi idha ‘‘sāmaññattho’’ti gahitā. Tenevāha ‘‘sati uttarikaraṇīye’’ti. Paṭivedayāmīti punappunaṃ ñāpemi.
417 「单凭业道」的意思是:仅仅因为它是不善业道的缘故。因此,即便是那种程度的不善业,比丘也不应作。正由于它属于粗重恶行,比丘才应当远离——这是其中的意旨。「为学处所系」,即受学处制定的约束。经中所说的「在水瓶、钵中,或对乌鸦,或以手、棍、石块等」,这一切都仅属举例说明。应当了知:在任何地方,驱赶等各种令其他生命不悦的行为,在此都以「身行不清净」的状态被含摄。「明显」意指向上伸展而显著;这种状态,恰如在贫瘠土地上生长的优良娑罗树,越升越高,越来越明显,故说为「升起、明显」。「无覆」即无遮盖。因此说「无覆藏」,意为无所隐藏。「同一」,是指在清净性上前后一致。「无间断」,指在相续的正行中无有裂缝,连续不断。「防护」,指身的律仪已远离杂染。故说此犹如……显示巴利原文
417.Kammapathavasenevāti akusalakammapathabhāveneva, tato tādisampi akusalakammaṃ bhikkhussa kātuṃ na yuttanti duṭṭhullabhāveneva tato oramatīti adhippāyo. Sikkhāpadabaddhenāti sikkhāpadapaññāpanena. Pānīyaghaṭe vā patte vā kākānaṃ hatthaṃ vā daṇḍaṃ vā leḍḍuṃ vāti sabbamidaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yattha katthaci hi ṭhitānaṃ aññesampi pāṇīnaṃ uṭṭhāpanādi sabbaṃ aniṭṭhakaraṇaṃ idha aparisuddhakāyasamācārabhāveneva saṅgahitanti. Uttānoti uddhamuddhaṃ tanotīti uttāno. Evaṃbhūto ca kenaci anuppādabhūmiyaṃ sañjātasālakalyāṇīkhandho viya uparūpari uggatuggato pākaṭo ca hotīti āha ‘‘uggato pākaṭo’’ti. Anāvaṭoti anivuto. Tenāha ‘‘asañchanno’’ti, nacchādetabboti attho. Ekasadiso visuddhabhāvena. Antarantare chiddarahito pubbenāparaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā sandhānena. Saṃvuto kāyikassa saṃvarassa anupakkilesato. Tenāha ‘‘kilesānaṃ dvāraṃ pidahanenā’’ti.
418 在此应当了知:如同那些较轻的起身等身业,因破坏了严净的苦行而成为身行不清净;邪思惟仅是导致意行不清净。同样,任何无助于出离的闲话,也仅是导致语行不清净,因为它同样破坏了严净的苦行。这不应被理解为以戏笑之心故意说谎。因为以戏笑之心故意说谎,已为学处所明令禁止。显示巴利原文
418. Ettha yathā lahukataraṃ kākuṭṭhāpanādikāyakammaṃ kāyasamācārassa aparisuddhabhāvāvahaṃ sallekhavikopanato, micchāvitakkanamattañca manosamācārassa, evaṃ yaṃ kiñci aniyyānakathākathanamattaṃ vacīsamācārassa aparisuddhabhāvāvahaṃ sallekhavikopanato, na hasādhippāyena musākathananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Hasādhippāyena hi musākathanaṃ sikkhāpadabaddheneva paṭikkhittanti.
420 在活命方面,亦有个别为业道所禁止的情形,这是可见的。然而,那种极为粗重的活命违犯,在身行和语行清净的章节中已作说明,故此处不予收录,应如是了知。有些人说:‘由于那种行为不合比丘的威仪,故而未予收录。’此说是错误的。若果真如此,则在身行和语行的章节中,也不应将那种行为收录,这会招致过失。至于「你们吃吧、喝吧」这般询问,因为表露了提问者自己想要吃的动机,且属间接言说,便构成了对严净行的破坏。显示巴利原文
420. Ājīvopi ekacco kammapathavasena vārito labbhati. So pana atioḷāriko kāyavacīsamācāravāresu vuttanayo evāti na gahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ye pana ‘‘tādiso bhikkhūnaṃ ayogyato na gahito’’ti vadanti, taṃ micchā tathā sati kāyavacīsamācāravārepi tassa aggahetabbabhāvāpattito. ‘‘Khādatha pivathā’’ti pucchā attano khāditukāmatādīpanena, pariyāyakathābhāvato panesā sallekhavikopanā jātā.
422 舍离不正当的谋生方式,以如法、公平的方式寻求资具,便称为“乞求知量者”。接受供养时,能了知施者、应施之物与自身这三方面的限度,便称为“受持知量者”。经过如理省察之后方受用所得资具,便称为“受用知量者”。显示巴利原文
422. Anesanaṃ pahāya dhammena samena paccaye pariyesanto pariyesanamattaññū nāma. Dāyakassa deyyadhammassa attano ca pamāṇaññutāpaṭiggaṇhanto paṭiggahaṇamattaññū nāma. Yoniso paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanto paribhogamattaññū nāma.
423 “于一分时”:指在称为中夜的那一分时间里,以左胁躺卧。之所以这样说,是因为并无右胁而卧的情况——右手需用来抓握身体等,不便安卧。这是就男性而言的。显示巴利原文
423.Ekasmiṃkoṭṭhāseti majjhimayāmasaññite ekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Vāmena passena sentī’’ti evaṃ vuttā. Dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi dakkhiṇahatthassa sarīraggahaṇādipayogakkhamato. Purisavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ.
“由于具足威光”:此言显示狮子的无畏特质。其余胆小的野兽进入自己的巢穴时,总是心怀恐惧,随意躺卧;而狮子因为无畏,如同保持正知的比丘,先令正念现前,然后方卧。故说“两只前足……”等。
“卧”:指没有劳作的状态于此持续,因此称为“卧”,即第四禅那。那么,那第四禅那是什么呢?有人说是指入出息念的第四禅那,世尊安住其中,增长观,次第证得最上道,因而成为如来——有些人这样说。但这只能称为近因,并非卧。另有些人则执取“世尊在第四禅那之后立即般涅槃”这句话,认为:“世间的第四禅那等至便是如来的卧。”如果那样,如来卧就成了般涅槃时才有的情况,而世尊并非以频频进入第四禅那为常住的。这里所说的“第四禅那”,实际是指最上果的禅那。在此,如同众生的卧以睡眠消逝为相,依有分心的转起而存在,并且这种卧对他们来说,是从最初结生便通常具有的;同样,世尊的卧是伴随圣生、通常具有的,以最上果位为体的第四禅那,应当知道就是“如来的卧”。
“狮子卧”即是最胜之卧,故说为“无上卧”。显示巴利原文
Tejussadattāti iminā sīhassa abhīrukabhāvaṃ dasseti. Bhīrukā hi sesamigā attano āsayaṃ pavisitvā santāsapubbakaṃ yathā tathā sayanti, sīho pana abhīrukabhāvato satokārī bhikkhu viya satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāva sayati. Tenāha ‘‘dve purimapāde’’tiādi. Seti abyāvaṭabhāvena pavattati etthāti seyyā, catutthajjhānameva seyyā. Kiṃ pana taṃ catutthajjhānanti? Ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ. Tattha hi ṭhatvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā bhagavā anukkamena aggamaggaṃ adhigato tathāgato jātoti keci, tayidaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma na seyyā. Apare pana ‘‘catutthajjhānasamanantarā bhagavā parinibbāyī’’ti vuttapadaṃ gahetvā ‘‘lokiyacatutthajjhānasamāpatti tathāgataseyyā’’ti vadanti, tathā sati parinibbānakālikā tathāgataseyyāti āpajjati, na ca bhagavā catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjanabahulo vihāsi, aggaphalajhānaṃ panettha ‘‘catutthajjhāna’’nti adhippetaṃ. Tattha yathā sattānaṃ niddupagamanalakkhaṇā seyyā bhavaṅgacittavāravasena hoti, tañca tesaṃ paṭhamajātisamanvayaṃ yebhuyyavuttikaṃ, evaṃ bhagavato ariyajātisamanvayaṃ yebhuyyavuttikaṃ aggaphalabhūtaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ ‘‘tathāgataseyyā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Sīhaseyyāti seṭṭhaseyyāti āha ‘‘uttamaseyyā’’ti.
426 “消除了债务”:即债务的根源。那些债务的“终结”:指剩余的部分。显示巴利原文
426.Vigatantānīti iṇamūlāni. Tesanti iṇamūlānaṃ. Pariyantoti avaseso.
“以制止转起而断绝四威仪”:即断除四种威仪。“疾病”:即折磨。“痛苦者”:即已生起痛苦的人。“微弱力”:指仅有少许力量。此处的“量”字并非如“由于舍离少许乐”等句中那样表示“微少”,而是表示“力”,与力量之义无异。“其余的”:指应说的其余内容,例如“当他作意‘我已从那个束缚中解脱’时,那两者便生起”等,故如此说。“于一切处”:即在所说的其余一切状况中。“随意而去”:即“随意而行者”,此处释义未作鼻音的省略。“自在者”:指能随自己的安乐而支配自我的人。因此当有主人可期望时,称为“有主者”,也就是主人。又因他已不再属于他人,故而表述为“属于自己的”。“旷野”:指没有水的漫长道路,因其难以越渡,而有人能从此渡过,故称旷野。显示巴利原文
Pavattinivāraṇena catuiriyāpathaṃ chindanto. Ābādhatīti pīḷeti. Dukkhitoti sañjātadukkho. Appaṃ balaṃ balamattā. Appattho hi ayaṃ mattā-saddo ‘‘mattāsukhapariccāgā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 290) viya, balavattho pana mattā-saddo anatthantaro. Sesanti ‘‘tassa hi bandhanā muttomhīti āvajjayato tadubhayaṃ hotī’’tiādinā vattabbaṃ sandhāyāha. Sabbapadesūti vuttāvasiṭṭhesu sabbapadesu. Yenakāmaṃ yathāruci gacchatīti yenakāmaṃgamoti anunāsikalopaṃ akatvā niddeso. Bhujo attano yathāsukhaviniyogo isso icchitabbo etthāti bhujisso, sāmiko. So pana aparasantakatāya ‘‘attano santako’’ti vutto. Dullabhaāpatāya kaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāroti āha ‘‘nirudakaṃ dīghamagga’’nti.
“破坏”:指通过耗尽、误用等方式,令债务根源丝毫不剩,如此而行。“在那所贪的事物上”:即那作为贪欲对象的事物。那个人因那贪欲对象而被系缚:若是男人,即因女人;若是女人,即因男人。爱欲应被视为如同债务,因为它带来逼迫。显示巴利原文
Vināsetīti khādanadubbiniyojanādīhi yathā iṇamūlaṃ kiñci na hoti, tathā karoti. Yamhi rāgavatthumhi. So puggalo. Tena rāgavatthunā, puriso ce itthiyā, itthī ce purisena. Iṇaṃ viya kāmacchando daṭṭhabbo pīḷāsamānato.
「不知」即不了解。「你们莫作恼害」意为:不要扰乱安乐住,也就是不要加以逼迫,这是它的含义。
「嗔恨」应当被视为如同疾病,因为它破坏安乐。显示巴利原文
Na vindatīti na jānāti. Upaddavethāti sukhavihārassa upaddavaṃ karotha, vibādhethāti attho. Rogo viya byāpādo daṭṭhabbo sukhabhañjanasamānato.
「种种法门」:因为以种种因由、方便而庄严,又因蕴、处、界、缘起等法理的种种巧妙,故称为「种种理趣」。
「于听法时」即在于说法之时。法谈因可被听闻的意义而称为「听闻」。
如此,戒是这样分别的,禅那与神通是这样分别的,观与道果是这样分别的——他对于这样的听法,不知它的初、中、后。
「于终了时」指结束时。「啊,这理由」指依各处所确立的命题而运用的论证所得出的理由。「啊,这譬喻」指为了成立该理由,从同喻、异喻方面所确立的举例等。
「昏沉与睡眠」应当被视为如同牢狱,因为它障碍从苦中出离。显示巴利原文
Nānāvidhahetūpāyālaṅkatatāya khandhāyatanadhātupaṭiccasamuppādādidhammanītivicittatāya ca vicittanaye. Dhammassavaneti dhammakathāyaṃ. Kathā hi sotabbaṭṭhena ‘‘savana’’nti vuttā. Evamettha sīlaṃ vibhattaṃ, evaṃ jhānābhiññā, evaṃ vipassanāmaggaphalānīti neva tassa dhammassavanassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ jānāti. Uṭṭhiteti niṭṭhite. Aho kāraṇanti tattha tattha paṭiññānurūpena nikkhittasādhanavasena gahitakāraṇaṃ. Aho upamāti tasseva kāraṇassa patiṭṭhāpanavasena anvayato byatirekato ca patiṭṭhaṃ udāharaṇādi. Bandhanāgāraṃ viya thinamiddhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ dukkhato niyyānassa vibandhanato.
由于悔恨之盖没有不与掉举相伴而存在的,或者说,掉举与悔恨具有相同的作用、食和对治法,因此为了显示悔恨的领域,而说「在律中不了解的人」等。正如掉举使有情的内心不得平静,悔恨也是如此。又如掉举以亲属寻等为食,悔恨也是如此。又如止息是对治掉举的对治法,对悔恨也是如此。
「掉举与悔恨」应当被视为如同奴役,因为它带来不自在。显示巴利原文
Yasmā kukkuccanīvaraṇaṃ uddhaccarahitaṃ natthi, yasmā vā uddhaccakukkuccaṃ samānakiccāhārapaṭipakkhaṃ, tasmā kukkuccassa visayaṃ dassento ‘‘vinaye apakataññunā’’tiādimāha. Yathā hi uddhaccaṃ sattassa avūpasamakaraṃ, tathā kukkuccampi. Yathāpi uddhaccassa ñātivitakkādi āhāro, tathā kukkuccassapi. Yathā ca uddhaccassa samatho paṭipakkho, tathā kukkuccassapīti. Dāsabyaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ aseribhāvāpādanato.
以十六事为内容的疑渗透了以八事为内容的疑,因此说「于八处有疑」。「疑惑者」指犹豫不决的人。「决意后」指令其信受之后。「执取」指把握可信之事。面对面的爬行是āsappanā,周围的爬行是parisappanā。以这两个词,也说明心不喜乐的状态。「以此而不遍入安稳村之道,故为不遍入」:由于惊疑、遍疑的状态,心变得惊悚,依靠这种法的力量,这种法便称为惊悚,这是在说疑的相状,因此说「于心生起时」。「犹如旷野长路之道」:应当把它看作充满危险的旷野长路之道,因为它是导致不修行的原因。显示巴利原文
Soḷasavatthukā vicikicchā aṭṭhavatthukaṃ vicikicchaṃ anupaviṭṭhāti āha ‘‘aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vicikicchā’’ti. Vicikicchantoti saṃsayanto. Adhimuccitvāti pattiyāyetvā. Gaṇhitunti saddheyyavatthuṃ pariggahetuṃ. Abhimukhaṃ sappanaṃ āsappanaṃ, parito sappanaṃ parisappanaṃ. Padadvayenapi cittassa anicchanākārameva vadati. Khemantagāmimaggaṃ na pariyogāhati etenāti apariyogāhanaṃ, ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitabhāvena chambhitaṃ hoti cittaṃ yassa dhammassa vasena, so dhammo chambhitattanti vicikicchanākāramāha. Tenāha ‘‘cittassa uppādayamānā’’ti. Kantāraddhānamaggo viyāti sāsaṅkakantāraddhānamaggo viya daṭṭhabbā appaṭipattihetubhāvato.
这里没有债,故称无债者;无债的状态即是无债性,即不欠任何人的债。「事业圆满者」指已成就生计、营生事业的人。「障碍」(palibodha)——将ra音变为la音而来,意为阻碍、障碍,即不能自在安住;其根本原因,即是障难之根本。「修习六法已」指生起并增长执取不净相等六种法。而且应当知道,「修习六法已」在相应各处所指的是执取慈相等六种法。「舍断」即通过镇伏的方式舍断,因此说「在学处等被教导时」等。「于他事」指对于不同类的事物,或者说对于他人的境界。因为这五种欲功德,对比丘来说是他人的境界。说断爱欲如同无债,因为它能带来没有可爱事物的状态。显示巴利原文
Natthi ettha iṇanti aṇaṇo, tassa bhāvo āṇaṇyaṃ, kassaci iṇassa adhāraṇaṃ. Samiddhakammantoti nipphannajīvikappayogo. Paribundhati uparodhetīti ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā palibodho, aserivihāro, tassa mūlaṃ kāraṇanti palibodhamūlaṃ. Cha dhamme bhāvetvāti asubhanimittaggāhādike cha dhamme uppādetvā vaḍḍhetvā. Cha dhamme bhāvetvāti ca mettānimittaggāhādayo ca tattha tattha cha dhammāti vuttāti veditabbo. Pajahatīti vikkhambhanavasena pajahati. Tenāha ‘‘ācārapaṇṇattiādīni sikkhāpiyamāno’’tiādi. Paravatthumhīti visabhāgavatthusmiṃ, paravisaye vā. Paravisayā hete bhikkhuno, yadidaṃ pañca kāmaguṇā. Āṇaṇyamiva kāmacchandappahānaṃ āha piyavatthuabhāvāvahato.
那些防护威仪缺失的学处,即是威仪制戒等。说断除嗔恨如同健康,因为它能带来身心的安乐状态。显示巴利原文
Ācāravipattipaṭibāhakāni sikkhāpadāni ācārapaṇṇattiādīni. Ārogyamiva byāpādappahānaṃ āha kāyacittānaṃ phāsubhāvāvahato.
说断除昏沉与睡眠,犹如挣脱束缚,因为它能带来心的不被压抑状态。显示巴利原文
Bandhanā mokkhamiva thinamiddhappahānaṃ āha cittassa niggahitabhāvāvahato.
说断除掉举与悔恨,犹如获得自由,因为它能带来心的自在状态。显示巴利原文
Bhujissaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccappahānaṃ āha cittassa seribhāvāvahato.
“如草”指把它视同草芥。“不计”指不去在意。说断除疑惑,犹如安稳之地,因为它是无有惊疑、无有遍疑状态的正行道之因。显示巴利原文
Tiṇaṃviyāti tiṇamiva katvā. Agaṇetvāti acintetvā. Khemantabhūmiṃ viya vicikicchāpahānaṃ āha anussaṅkitāparisaṅkitabhāvena sammāpaṭipattihetubhāvato.
427 「作」指被投入胎藏中,故称为作,即出生义;从作而生起的,称为作生,意为父母所生。另一些人说,藉由母亲身体的形成而从作所生,故称作生。无论依哪种说法,作生身皆指四种相续的色法。「润湿」即令湿透。那么,这里何为湿润的状态?答曰:「以爱而润」,即依喜的润泽来滋养,这就是义。因此说「令一切处现行的喜乐」。此处,由喜所生的殊胜色法遍满整个作生身,由此表明喜乐能于一切处现行。在「遍流」等处,道理也一样。于彼中亦应如实地理解为「周围流动、润湿、以爱而润,令一切处现行的喜乐」等义。「充满」即以此喜乐遍满此作生身,犹如风充满皮囊一般。「周触」即以此喜乐周遍触证此作生身。「一切处」是把a音转为ā音,表示具足一切肢体,这便是义。所谓「以一切分」,即指以肉等一切部分。无有一处不被触及,因为由喜乐所生的色法确实遍满一切处。能做、能连接、善令相续、能警觉,这是连接上的解释。如同用手揉合沐浴粉制成团时,容器会受到挤压,故说「令相续时破散」。「随入」即渗入。「遍入」即周遍一切处而湿润。显示巴利原文
427. Kirīyati (a. ni. ṭī. 3.5.28-29) gabbhāsaye khipīyatīti karo, sambhavo, karato jātoti karajo, mātāpettikasambhavoti attho. Mātuyā hi sarīrasaṇṭhāpanavasena karato jātoti karajoti apare. Ubhayathāpi karajakāyanti catusantatirūpamāha. Temetīti tintaṃ karoti. Ko panettha tintabhāvoti āha ‘‘snehetī’’ti, pītisnehena pīṇanaṃ karotīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘sabbattha pavattapītisukhaṃ karotī’’ti. Pītisamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpehi sakalassa karajakāyassa pariphuṭatāya cettha taṃsamuṭṭhāpakapītisukhānaṃ sabbattha pavatti jotitā. Parisandetītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tatthāpi hi ‘‘samantato sandeti temeti sneheti, sabbattha pavattapītisukhaṃ karotī’’tiādinā yathārahaṃ attho veditabbo. Paripūretīti vāyunā bhastaṃ viya imaṃ karajakāyaṃ pītisukhena pūreti. Samantato phusatīti imaṃ karajakāyaṃ pītisukhena phusati. Sabbāvatoti a-kārassa ā-kāro kato, sabbāvayavavatoti atthoti āha ‘‘sabbakoṭṭhāsavato’’ti, maṃsādisabbābhāgavatoti attho. Aphuṭaṃ nāma na hoti pītisukhasamuṭṭhānehi rūpehi sabbatthakameva byāpitattā. Kātuñceva yojetuñca cheko sannetuṃ paṭibaloti yojanā. Nhānīyacuṇṇānaṃ parimaddanavasena piṇḍaṃ karontena hatthena bhājanaṃ nippīḷetabbaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘sannentassa bhijjatī’’ti. Anugatāti anupaviṭṭhā. Parigatāti parito samantato tintā. Tintabhāveneva samaṃ antaraṃ bāhirañca etissāti santarabāhirā. Sabbatthakamevāti sabbattheva. Na ca pagghariṇī pamāṇayuttasseva udakassa sittattā. Ettha ca nhānīyapiṇḍaṃ viya karajakāyo, taṃ temetvā sampiṇḍitapamāṇayuttaudakaṃ viya paṭhamajjhānasukhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
428 「从下涌出上升之水」:指从湖池底部,以粗大的水流涌出而上升的水。「于内涌出之水」:指在湖池内部,并非形成粗大水流,而是从现起的水脉口涌出的水。「来路」:指从河流、湖泊、山涧、池塘等处流入的路径。显示巴利原文
428.Heṭṭhā ubbhijjitvā uggacchanaudakoti rahadassa adhothūladhārāvasena ubbhijja uṭṭhahanaudako. Antoyeva ubbhijjanaudakoti rahadassa abbhantareyeva thūladhārā ahutvā uṭṭhitaudakasirāmukhehi ubbhijjanako. Āgamanamaggoti nadītaḷākakandarasaraādito āgamanamaggo.
429 此处因有青莲丛,故称「青莲池」,即水域。这便是此处的义理抉择。正如世间将红眼之人称为「白莲眼」一样。然而有些人说:红莲是红莲花,白莲是白莲花。青莲等花譬如此作生身,水譬如第三禅那之乐──这一层意义,依「前理类推」便已阐明,应如此看待。显示巴利原文
429. Uppalagacchāni ettha santīti uppalinī (a. ni. ṭī. 3.5.28-29), vāri. Ayamettha vinicchayo, tathā hi loke rattakkhiko ‘‘puṇḍarīkakkho’’ti vuccati. Keci pana ‘‘rattaṃ padumaṃ, setaṃ puṇḍarīka’’nti vadanti. Uppalādīni viya karajakāyo, udakaṃ viya tatiyajjhānasukhanti ayampi attho ‘‘purimanayenā’’ti atideseneva vibhāvitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
430 “无随烦恼”之义:指不被尘垢等染污,处于无垢的状态。即使无垢的事物,有些亦具光辉自性,故说“光辉”之义。“时节触”:指炎热时节的触。业所生身遍满禅那之乐,如被时节所触的布,故说“如布之业所生身”。此处的“因此”,是以“如布”等所说义理为因,回指前义;意思是:业所生身犹如布,第四禅那之乐则如时节触。此处,舍本性寂静,于智慧中最为殊胜,故亦含摄于“乐”中,因此第四禅那亦用“乐”一词。经中说“以清净、遍净之心遍满而坐”,此即表第四禅那之心与布的特性相似。为显示由第四禅那所生之色遍满比丘之身,故说“禅那所生之色,犹如时节之触”。至于男子之身如同比丘的业所生身,此义显而易见,故未别加解释;或因已有“犹如某处……身体被触”之说,此义已含摄其中。显示巴利原文
430.Nirupakkilesaṭṭhenāti rajojallādinā anupakkiliṭṭhatāya amalīnabhāvena. Amalīnampi kiñci vatthu pabhassarasabhāvaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pabhassaraṭṭhenā’’ti. Utupharaṇanti uṇhautupharaṇaṃ. Sabbatthakameva jhānasukhena phuṭṭho karajakāyo yathā utunā phuṭṭhavatthasadisoti āha ‘‘vatthaṃ viya karajakāyo’’ti. Tasmāti ‘‘vatthaṃ viyā’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ hetubhāvena paccāmasati, karajakāyassa vatthasadisattā catutthajjhānasukhassa ca utupharaṇasadisattāti attho. Santasabhāvattā ñāṇuttarattā cettha upekkhāpi sukhe saṅgahitāti catutthajjhānepi sukhaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. ‘‘Parisuddhena pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hotī’’ti vacanato catutthajjhānacittassa vatthasadisatā vuttā. Catutthajjhānasamuṭṭhānarūpehi bhikkhuno kāyassa phuṭabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ utupharaṇaṃ viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Purisassa kāyo viya bhikkhuno karajakāyoti ayaṃ panattho pākaṭoti na gahito, gahito eva vā ‘‘yathā hi katthaci…pe… kāyo phuṭo hotī’’ti vuttattā.
431 “宿住智譬喻”:指已展示的宿住智譬喻。这是为了说明:于当日所作之行为,对一般常人而言,亦多明了。应如此理解:仅凭了解当日所经之三个村庄,即已暗示,对那些由大愿力而获宿住智者,于三有中所造作之行为,大多亦清晰昭然。显示巴利原文
431.Pubbenivāsañāṇaupamāyanti pubbenivāsañāṇassa dassitaupamāyaṃ. Taṃdivasaṃkatakiriyāgahaṇaṃ pākatikasattassapi yebhuyyena pākaṭā hotīti dassanatthaṃ. Taṃdivasagatagāmattayaggahaṇeneva mahābhinīhārehi aññesampi pubbenivāsañāṇalābhīnaṃ tīsu bhavesu katā kiriyā yebhuyyena pākaṭā hotīti dīpitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
432 “面对面之门”:指彼此相对而开的大门。“来来往往行走”:谓各随其事,往来行走。而“从此家……乃至……以进入方式”等言,乃为显示“死生智”之认知范围而说。“立于两家之间”:谓立于两家大门正对面之处,即中间街道的正中央。何以故?若一家门朝东,另一家门朝西,有明目之人立于两家之间的街巷中,面朝南或北,则出入之人,自然易见。同样,具天眼智者,于众生之死与结生,亦能清晰见之。然当知:如那人于不同刹那,一见入者,一见出者;此天眼智者亦于不同刹那,一见死者,一见结生者。应将“智之明显”之义带入文意。此处之“他的”,即指此智。显示巴利原文
432.Sammukhadvārāti aññamaññassa abhimukhadvārā. Aparāparaṃ sañcaranteti taṃtaṃkiccavasena ito cito ca sañcarante. Ito pana gehā…pe… pavisanavasenapīti idaṃ cutūpapātañāṇassa visayadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Dvinnaṃ gehānaṃ antare ṭhatvāti dvinnaṃ gehadvārānaṃ sammukhaṭṭhānabhūte antaravīthiyaṃ vemajjhe ṭhatvā. Tesu hi ekassa ce pācīnamukhadvāraṃ itarassa pacchimamukhaṃ, tassa sammukhaṃ ubhinnaṃ antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhitassa dakkhiṇāmukhassa, uttarāmukhassa vā cakkhumato purisassa tattha pavisanakanikkhamanakapurisā yathā sukheneva pākaṭā honti, evaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇasamaṅgino cavanakaupapajjanakapurisā. Yathā pana tassa purisassa aññeneva khaṇena pavisantassa dassanaṃ, aññena nikkhamantassa dassanaṃ, evaṃ imassapi aññeneva khaṇena cavamānassa dassanaṃ, aññena upapajjamānassa dassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ñāṇassa pākaṭāti ānetvā sambandho. Tassāti ñāṇassa.
433 山峰大多呈收缩、紧凑之状,因此这里将山顶称为「山的收缩」;或者,山所包含的区域也可称为山的收缩。「不浊」:指无浑浊。它之所以不浊,是因为没有烂泥,故说「无泥」。对于牛而言,无论站立还是卧着,都是指那些存在、可见的牛。至于其他事物,依同行共处的道理,无论是站立、卧着还是行走,都会被提及。然而,「只是站立着,从不行走」这一说法,是就两类东西而言的:贝类与贝壳,以及鱼群。这两类事物,在文字上说是「站立」,其义却也包含了「移动」。何必用这种相伴共处的关系来解释呢?实际上,这里应当理解为根据实际情况而采取不同的解说。也就是说,对于碎石、砂砾,应当用「站立」来搭配解说;而对于贝类、贝壳与鱼群,则应当用「或站或行」来搭配解说。显示巴利原文
433. Pabbatasikharaṃ yebhuyyena saṃkhittaṃ saṅkucitaṃ hotīti idha pabbatamatthakaṃ ‘‘pabbatasaṅkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ, pabbatapariyāpanno vā padeso pabbatasaṅkhepo. Anāviloti akālusso. Sā cassa anāvilatā kaddamābhāvena hotīti āha ‘‘nikkaddamo’’ti. Ṭhitāsupi nisinnāsupi gāvīsu. Vijjamānāsūti labbhamānāsu. Itarā ṭhitāpi nisinnāpi carantīti vuccanti sahacaraṇañāyena. Tiṭṭhantameva, na kadācipi carantaṃ. Dvayanti sippisammukaṃ macchagumbanti imaṃ ubhayaṃ tiṭṭhantanti vuttaṃ, carantampīti adhippāyo. Kiṃ vā imāya sahacariyāya, yathālābhaggahaṇaṃ panettha daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sakkharakathalassa hi vasena ‘‘tiṭṭhanta’’nti, sippisambukassa macchagumbassa ca vasena ‘‘tiṭṭhantampi, carantampī’’ti yojanā kātabbā.
434 「比丘」:即破除烦恼者,这就是比丘。从究竟义上讲,他实名为沙门。在这里,通过圣道完全平息一切恶法的人,就是沙门。故说「平息诸恶故」。于最殊胜义,称正自觉者为「梵」;由那圣道而来,所以称为梵,此梵即指圣道。由不迷乱的通达方式了知圣道,故称为「婆罗门」。正因具备了这圣道,他的诸恶才得以远离。故说「远离诸恶故,为婆罗门」。以八支圣道之水洗浴,洗净了烦恼的人,就是「沐浴者」。「已到达」:指由断除与证悟的方式而通达。故说「已了知故」。「已出离」:指由断除的舍弃,从生命相续中彻底根除烦恼。故说「未被执持故」。就划定界限的意义来说,即指以圣道,烦恼被渐次地或完全地断尽。故说「已破坏故」。「已远离」:指因已善断除,而处于全然隔离的状态。故说「已成遥远故」。这两组(圣与阿拉汉)都可从自他两利的意义上这样贯通解释:因为烦恼已远离、已破坏、已成遥远,所以称为「圣」;同样地,也以此称为「阿拉汉」。至于在此处没有从义理上详细区分开来的显示巴利原文
434.Bhikkhūti bhinnakilesoti bhikkhu. So hi paramatthato samaṇotināmako. Tattha ariyamaggena sabbaso pāpānaṃ samitāvīti samaṇo. Tenāha ‘‘samitapāpattā’’ti. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmā vuccati sammāsambuddho, tato āgatoti brahmā, ariyamaggo, taṃ asammohapaṭivedhavasena aññāsīti brāhmaṇo. Taṃsamaṅgitāya hissa pāpānaṃ bāhitabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇo’’ti. Aṭṭhaṅgikena ariyamaggajalena nhātavā niddhotakilesoti nhātako. Gatattāti pahānābhisamayavasena paṭividdhattā. Tenāha ‘‘viditattā’’ti. Nissutattāti samucchedappahānavasena santānato sabbaso nihatattā. Tenāha ‘‘apahatattā’’ti, mariyādavasena kilesānaṃ hiṃsitattā ariyamaggehi odhiso sabbaso kilesānaṃ samucchinnattāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘hatattā’’ti. Ārakattāti suppahīnatāya vippakaṭṭhabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘dūrībhūtattā’’ti. Ubhayampi ubhayattha yojetabbaṃ – kilesānaṃ ārakattā hatattā dūrībhūtattā ca ariyo, tathā arahanti. Yaṃ panettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ uttānatthattā suviññeyyameva.
十、《小马邑经》注释显示巴利原文
10. Cūḷaassapurasuttavaṇṇanā
435 与前经相同,意指「见到马城居民对比丘僧团的恭敬、尊重与礼敬之后,为了策励比丘们恭敬施食,而宣说此经」,这与前一部经《大马城经》(中部注释书2.415)中所说的内容一致。「适合沙门」:指适合沙门、与沙门身份相称的。「沙门随顺行道」:指随顺那称为沙门性的圣道之修行方式。显示巴利原文
435.Purimasadisamevāti ‘‘assapuravāsīnaṃ bhikkhusaṅghe gāravabahumānaṃ nipaccakārañca disvā bhikkhū piṇḍapātāpacāyane niyojento idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsī’’ti purimasutte mahāassapure (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.415) vuttasadisameva. Samaṇānaṃ anucchavikāti samaṇānaṃ samaṇabhāvassa anucchavikā patirūpā. Samaṇānaṃ anulomappaṭipadāti samaṇānaṃ sāmaññasaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa anukūlappaṭipadā.
436 “这些法”指经文中提到的贪欲、嗔恚等恶法。“正在生起”指正在生起的那一刹那,更不必说已在相续中反复修习的了。“被污染”指有垢秽、被染污。“被垢所执”指被垢秽所执取、已生起垢秽。“沙门垢”指沙门状态上的垢秽。“被毁坏”指衰败、灭坏。“沙门过患”指对沙门状态的毁损。“粗劣”指无有实质。“无力”指无有光辉。恶趣,指地狱等,因从铁、从快乐脱离而得名;这些法以其果报为对象,或以其为目的,故是“堕恶趣的”。这些处所即是贪欲等。因此说“在恶趣里”等。作为因,它们能带来属于恶趣的受,故是“感恶趣受的”。因此说“是令恶趣中生起异熟受的缘”。“锋利的铁”指如金刚般的锐利之铁。以铁,即用铁锤。据说,鹳鸟腹中宿存的任何东西都会变得粗糙锐利,因而其粪便甚至能消融骨头和石头,所以经文说“让鹳鸟来啄食”。据说那铁粉末,用火也很难烧化,但借由药力却容易烧化,所以经文说“善巧的铁匠们,得到大量手工原料后便能制作”等。它极为锋利,能轻易斩断某种铁制的束缚,犹如砍断一根桐木棍。显示巴利原文
436.Ete dhammāti ete pāḷiyaṃ āgatā abhijjhābyāpādādayo pāpadhammā. Uppajjamānāti uppajjamānā eva, pageva santāne bhāvitā. Malineti malavante kiliṭṭhe. Malaggahiteti gahitamale sañjātamale. Samaṇamalāti samaṇānaṃ samaṇabhāvassa malā. Dussantīti vipajjanti vinassanti. Samaṇadosāti samaṇānaṃ samaṇabhāvadūsanā. Kasaṭeti asāre. Nirojeti nitteje. Ayato sukhato apetāti apāyā, nirayādayo, taṃ phalaṃ arahanti, taṃ payojanaṃ vā etesanti āpāyikā. Ṭhānāni abhijjhādayo. Tenāha ‘‘apāye’’tiādi. Kāraṇabhāvena duggatipariyāpannāya vedanāya hitānīti duggativedaniyāni. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘duggatiyaṃ vipākavedanāya paccayāna’’nti. Tikhiṇaṃ ayanti vekantakasadisaṃ sāraayaṃ. Ayenāti ayoghaṃsakena. Koñcasakuṇānaṃ kira kucchiyaṃ nivutthaṃ yaṃ kiñci kharaṃ tikhiṇañca hoti. Tathā hi tesaṃ vaccaṃ aṭṭhimpi pāsāṇampi vilīyāpeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘koñcasakuṇe khādāpentī’’ti. Taṃ kira ayacuṇṇaṃ aggināpi kicchena dayhati, bhesajjabalena pana sukhena dayheyya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘susikkhitā ca naṃ ayakārā bahuhatthakammamūlaṃ labhitvā karontī’’tiādi. Atitikhiṇaṃ hoti, aññataraṃ ayobandhanaṃ pheggudaṇḍaṃ viya sukheneva chindanti. Sasabiḷāracammehi saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena saṅghāṭīti vuccati āvudhaparicchadoti āha ‘‘saṅghāṭiyāti kosiyā’’ti. Pariyonaddhanti parito onaddhaṃ chāditaṃ. Samantato veṭhitanti sabbaso pihitaṃ.
437 “尘”指外来沾染的尘土。“垢”指身体上自然产生的汗垢等污秽。尘与垢因持戒而不去除,存在于他身上,故称“持尘垢者”,指那样的状态。因此说“持尘垢者”。“入水”等词句的意义,在《大狮子吼经》注释中已有说明。当说到“所有这一切”等处时,意指这一切悉皆依持戒的修行而说。因为这一切悉皆为外道修行,故“穿僧伽帝者”是指穿着由碎布片缝合而成的、被称为“僧伽帝”之衣的人。实际上,经中只说“穿僧伽帝者”,而非说“比丘”。故注释说“在这当中”等。那么,世尊为何在此处仅驳斥穿僧伽帝等持戒的修行呢?这只是举例示范,因为驳斥这些,便自然驳斥了如五热炙身、牛禁戒等其他修行。另有人说:当世尊说“诸比丘,我不因仅仅穿着僧伽帝就说有沙门性”时,在场有位外道信徒可能想:“那么裸形外道呢?”其他人想:“那么持尘垢者呢?”为顺应他们各自心中所思,世尊特于此驳斥这些特定的持戒修行。“穿僧伽帝者”指以内衣和外衣的方式穿着僧伽帝衣的人。因此说“僧伽帝衣”等。最初可能凭自己的显示巴利原文
437.Rajoti āgantukarajo. Jallanti sarīre uṭṭhānakaloṇādimalaṃ. Rajojallañca vatasamādānavasena anapanītaṃ etassa atthīti rajojalliko, tassa. Tenāha ‘‘rajojalladhārino’’ti. Udakaṃ orohantassātiādīnamattho mahāsīhanādasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttoyeva. Sabbametantiādīsu sabbasopi vatasamādānavasenāti adhippāyo. Yasmā sabbametaṃ bāhirasamayavaseneva kathitaṃ, tasmā saṅghāṭikassāti pilotikakhaṇḍehi saṅghaṭitattā ‘‘saṅghāṭī’’ti laddhanāmavatthadhārinoti attho. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘saṅghāṭikassa’’icceva vuttaṃ, na ‘‘bhikkhuno’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘imasmiṃ hī’’tiādi. Kasmā panettha bhagavatā saṅghāṭikattādīniyeva vatasamādānāni paṭikkhittānīti? Nayadassanametaṃ aññesampi pañcātapamūgavatādīnaṃ tappaṭikkhepeneva pasiddhito. Apare pana bhaṇanti – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, saṅghāṭikassa saṅghāṭidhāraṇamattena sāmaññaṃ vadāmī’’ti vutte tattha nisinno koci titthantaraladdhiko acelakattaṃ nu kho kathanti cintesi, apare rajojallakattaṃ nu kho kathanti, evaṃ taṃ taṃ cintentānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena bhagavā imāneva vatasamādānāni idha paṭikkhipīti. Saṅghāṭikanti nivāsanapārupanavasena saṅghāṭivantaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saṅghāṭikaṃ vattha’’ntiādi. Attano ruciyā mittādayo saṅghāṭikaṃ kareyyuṃ, pacchā viññutaṃ pattakāle saṅghāṭikatte samādapeyyuṃ.
438 由于贪欲等不再现行,他见到自己是清净的。然而,还不能说他是依圣道断尽烦恼而清净。“欢悦”指微细的喜悦。当他见到自己因正确的修行镇伏烦恼、心得清净时,便生起欢悦,那是一种满意的状态。故说“满意的状态”。“喜”指能生轻安的强盛喜悦。“名身轻安”一词,指心所和心两者的轻安。“感受”指体验、领受。如今,由于他的心已从五盖中获得清净,故说“如同达到安止定一般”。由于从一个地方生起,又进入另一地方,以此为譬喻,加上层次的相似性,前文以对治不善法的方式结束说法,故说此为“随顺连贯”。在《大狮子吼经》中,以池塘譬喻道,经文从“舍利弗,譬如有一个池塘”(《中部》1.154)等开始,于譬喻与法义结合时说:“这位行者这样行道,这样修习,登上了那样的道,以至于漏尽”(《中部》1.154)。正如从东方等各方来的人,依凭那池塘获得身体清净,远离了热恼;同样,从刹帝利等家族出身的人,依于如来所宣说的法与律的教法,获得名身清净,远离了烦恼的热恼。显示巴利原文
438.Attānaṃ visujjhantaṃ passati abhijjhādīnaṃ samudācārābhāvato. Maggena asamucchinnattā visuddhoti pana na vattabbo. Pāmojjanti taruṇapītimāha. Tassa hi attano sammāpaṭipattiyā kilesānaṃ vikkhambhitattā cittassa visuddhataṃ passantassa pāmojjaṃ jāyati, taṃ tuṭṭhākāraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tuṭṭhākāro’’ti. Pītīti passaddhiāvahā balavapīti. Nāmakāyo passambhatīti iminā ubhayampi passaddhiṃ vadati. Vediyatīti anubhavati vindati. Idāni tena nīvaraṇehi cittassa visodhanattaṃ laddhanti āha ‘‘appanāppattaṃ viya hotī’’ti. Aññattha uṭṭhitā aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatāti ettakena upamābhāvena uccanīcatāsāmaññena heṭṭhā asaddhammānaṃ paṭipakkhavasena desanāya pariyosāpitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘yathānusandhinā’’ti. Mahāsīhanādasutte maggo pokkharaṇiyā upamito ‘‘seyyathāpi, sāriputta, pokkharaṇī’’tiādiṃ (ma. ni. 1.154) ārabhitvā upamāsaṃsandane ‘‘tathāyaṃ puggalo paṭipanno, tathā ca iriyati, tañca maggaṃ samāruḷho, yathā āsavānaṃ khayā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.154) vuttattā. Yathā hi puratthimādidisāhi āgatā purisā taṃ pokkharaṇiṃ āgamma visuddharūpakāyā vigatapariḷāhā ca honti, evaṃ khattiyādikulato āgatā tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ sāsanaṃ āgamma visuddhanāmakāyā vigatakilesapariḷāhā ca honti. Tasmā sabbakilesānaṃ samitattā paramatthasamaṇo hotīti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.